Aws-D14 1M PDF

--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
COPYRIGHT 2003; American Welding Society, Inc. Document provided by IHS Licensee=IHS Dealers/IHSINTL003, User=MCHACON,
02/21/2003 09:16:48 MST Questions or comments about this message: please call
the Document Policy Management Group at 1-800-451-1584.
Key Words- Cranes, industrial cranes, lifting ANSVAWS D l 4.1 -97
devices, material handling equipment, An American National Standard
mill cranes
Approved by
American National Standards Institute
December 8,1997
Specification for
Welding of Industrial and
Mill Cranes and Other
Material Handling Equipment
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Supersedes ANSI/AWS D14.1-85
Prepared by
AWS Committee on
Machinery and Equipment
Under the Direction of

AWS Technical Activities Committee
Approved by
AWS Board of Directors
Abstract
Requirements are presented for the design andfabrication of constructional steel weldments that are used in industrial
and mill cranes, lifting devices and othermaterial handling equipment. Requirements are alsoincluded for modification,
weld repair and postweld treatments of new and existing weldments. Filler metal and welding procedure guidelines are
recommended for the applicable base metals, which are limited to carbon and low-alloy steels. Allowable unit stresses
are provided for weld metal and base metal for various cyclically loaded joint designs.
American Welding Society

550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33 126
Statement onUse of AWS Standards
All standards (codes, specifications, recommended practices, methods, classifications, and guides) of the American
Welding Society are voluntary consensus standards that have been developed in accordance with the rulesof the Ameri-
can National Standards Institute. WhenAWS standards are either incorporated in, or made part of, documents that are
included in federal or state laws and regulations, or the regulationsof other governmental bodies, their provisions carry
the full legal authorityof the statute. In such cases, any changes in thoseAWS standards must be approvedby the gov-
ernmental body having statutory jurisdiction beforethey can become a part of those laws and regulations. In all cases,
these standards carry the full legal authorityof the contract or other document that invokes theAWS standards. Where
this contractual relationship exists, changesin or deviations from requirementsof an AWS standard must be by agree-
ment between the contracting parties.
International Standard BookNumber: 0-87 171-518-X
American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami,FL 33126
O 1998 by American Welding Society. All rights reserved

Printed in the United Statesof America
Note: The primary purpose of AWS is to serve and benefit its members.To this end, AWS provides a forum for theex-
change, consideration, and discussion of ideas and proposals that are relevant to the welding industryand the consensus
of which forms the basis for these standards.By providing such a forum, AWS does not assume any duties to which a
user of these standards maybe required to adhere.By publishing this standard, the AmericanWelding Society does not
insure anyone using the information it contains against any liability arising from that use. Publicationof a standard by
the American Welding Society does not carry with it any right to make, use,or sell any patented items. Usersof the in-
formation in this standard should make an independent, substantiating investigation of the validity of that information
for their particular useand the patent status of any item referred toherein.
With regard to technical inquiries made concerning AWS standards, oral opinions on AWS standards may be rendered.
However, such opinions represent only the personal opinions
of the particular individuals giving them. These individuals
or unofficial opinions or interpretations of
do not speak on behalf of AWS, nor do these oral opinions constitute official
AWS. In addition, oral opinions are informal and should
not be used as a substitute foran official interpretation.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the AWS Committee on Machinery and Equipment. It must be re-
viewed every fiveyears and if not revised, it must be either reapprovedor withdrawn. Comments (recommendations, ad-
ditions, or deletions) and any pertinent data that may be of use in improving this standard are requestedand should be
addressed toAWS Headquarters. Such comments will receive careful consideration by the AWS Committee on Machin-
ery and Equipment and the author of the comments will be informed of the Committee's response to the comments.
Guests are invited to attend all meetings of the AWS Committee on Machinery and Equipment to express their com-
ments verbally. Procedures for appealof an adverse decision concerning allsuch comments are providedin the Rulesof
Operation of the Technical Activities Committee. A copy of these Rules can be obtained from the American Welding
Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126.
Photocopy Rights
Authorization to photocopy itemsfor internal, personal, or educational classroom use only, or the internal, personal,or
educational classroom use onlyof specific clients,is granted by the AmericanWelding Society (AWS) provided that the
appropriate fee is paid to the Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: 508-750-
8400; online: http://www.copyright.com
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Personnel
AWS Committee on Machinery and Equipment
R. G. Bartqay, Chairman CBART Consulting, Incorporated
P: J. Palzkill, Ist Vice Chairman Consultant
W C. Pugmire, 2nd Vice Chairman Reynolds Electrical Engineering Company
C. B. Pollock, Secretary American Welding Society
L. E. Anderson Consultant
*C. E. Childress Consultant
P: Collins P C Campana, Incorporated
G. E. Cossaboom Consultant
S. D. Coulstring The Howden Fan Company
R. D.Cutcher TLT-Babcock, Incorporated
*R. T. Hemzacek Consultant
B. Horn Acutus Industries
*C. F: Koenig Consultant
D..J. Landon Vermeer Manufacturing Company
D.J. Malito Girard Machine Company, Incorporated
D. C. Martinez Danmar Engineering Company, Incorporated
A. R. Mellini, SI: Mellini and Associates, Incorporated
*H. W Mishler Consultant
R. E. Munson Radian Corporation
J. G. Nelson TRW, Incorporated
B. E. Schaltenbrand JS Engineering, Incorporated
L. Y Sunwoo Lockheed-Martin
W A. Svekric Welding Consultants, Incorporated
H. W Ward Euclid-Hitachi Heavy Equipment, Incorporated
S. W Wismer Consultant
E. G. Yevick Weld-Met International, Incorporated
!L R. Zegers R. E. Technical Services, Incorporated
AWS Subcommittee on Industrial and Mill Cranes
J. G. Nelson, Chairman TRW, Incorporated
C. B. Pollock, Secretary American Welding Society
R. G. Bartifuy CBART Consulting, Incorporated
L. P. Gunnel1 Harnischfeger Corporation
B. E. Schaltenbrand JS Engineering, Incorporated
R. P. Schuster Harnischfeger Corporation
W A. Svekric Welding Consultants, Incorporated
E. G. Yevick Weld-Met International, Incorporated
*Advisor
...
111
Foreword
(This Foreword is not a partof ANSYAWS D14.1-97, Specification for Welding of industrial and Mill Cranes and
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Other Material Handling Equipment, but is included for information purposes

only.)
This specification was prepared for the overhead crane and material handling industriesto continue the advance of
welding and to increase product reliability. This edition provides revisionto ANSUAWS D14.1-85, Specification f i r
Welding of Industrial and Mill Cranes and Other Material Handling Equipment, under the direction of the AWS Ma-
chinery and Equipment Committee.
The participating committee, representing manufacturers, users, and government, joined in the preparation of this
document. It will provide all concerned, including the general public, with high quality, reliable products and an eco-
nomical approach to production, consistent with the industry’s capabilities.
This specification will be reviewed periodically to assure its successin serving all parties concerned with its provi-
sions. Revisions willbe issued when warranted.
Comments and suggestions for the improvement of this standard are welcome. They should be addressed to the
Secretary, AWS Committee on Machinery and Equipment, AmericanWelding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miamí,
FL 33 126.
Oficial interpretations of any of the technical requirementsof this standardmay be obtained by sending a request,in
writing, to the Managing Director, Technical Services Division, AmericanWelding Society. A formal reply will be is-
sued after it has been reviewed by the appropriate personnel following established procedures.
iv
Table of Contents
Page No .
...
Personnel .................................................................................................................................................................... 111
Foreword .................................................................................................................................................................. ¡v
...
List of Tables ............................................................................................................................................................ VIU
Lisf of Figures ............................................................................................................................................................. ix
Scope .................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1. General Provisions ............................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1Acceptance ................................................................................................................................................. 1
I .2 Definitions .................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3Welding Symbols ........................................................................................................................................ 2
1.4 Mechanical Testing of Welds ..................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 Filler Metal Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 2
1.6 SafetyPrecautions ...................................................................................................................................... 2
1.7 ApplicableDocuments ............................................................................................................................... 2
2. Base Metals .......................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Proprietary Base Metals ............................................................................................................................. 3
2.3 Tensile and Yield Strengths of a Base Metal .............................................................................................. 3
2.4 Weldability.................................................................................................................................................. 3
2.5 Quenched and Tempered Steels.................................................................................................................. 3
2.6 Nonferrous Metals ...................................................................................................................................... 3
3. Allowable Stresses................................................................................................................................................ 3
3.1General ....................................................................................................................................................... 3
3.2Fatigue ........................................................................................................................................................ 6
4 . Weld Joint Design ............................................................................................................................................... - 6
4.1GeneralRequirements ................................................................................................................................ 6
4.2Groove Welds ............................................................................................................................................. 8
4.3 Intermittent Groove Welds ......................................................................................................................... 8
4.4 Fillet Welds ................................................................................................................................................. 8
4.5 Intermittent Fillet Welds ........................................................................................................................... 16
4.6 Staggered Intermittent Fillet Welds .......................................................................................................... 16
4.7 Plug and Slot Welds .................................................................................................................................. 16
4.8 Suggested Classification of Welded Joints ............................................................................................... 17
4.9 Weld Joint Classes .................................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 O Joint Qualification .................................................................................................................................... 17
4.11 Transition of Thicknesses or Widths at Butt Joints .................................................................................. 17
4.12 Prequalified Extension Bars, Runoff Plates, and Backing Materials....................................................... 45
4.13 Dimensional Tolerances ........................................................................................................................... 45
4.14 Lap Joints.................................................................................................................................................. 46
4.15 Comer and T-Joints .................................................................................................................................. 46
4.16 Welds in Combination with Rivets and Bolts........................................................................................... 46
4 . I7 Eccentricity of Connections ..................................................................................................................... 46
5 Workmanship...................................................................................................................................................... 46
5.1 General ..................................................................................................................................................... 46
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
V
Page No.
5.2 Preparation of the Base Metal .................................................................................................................. 46
5.3 Visual Inspection and Repairof Plate and Wrought Steel Products......................................................... 47
5.4 Assembly .................................................................................................................................................. 49
5.5 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage Stresses .......................................................................................... 50
5.6 Stress Relief .............................................................................................................................................. 50
5.7 Vibratory Conditioning ............................................................................................................................. 50
5.8 Peening ..................................................................................................................................................... 51
6. Processes and Filler Metals ............................................................................................................................... 51
6.1General ..................................................................................................................................................... 51
6.2 Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)..................................................................................................... 52
6.3 Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) .............................................................................................................. 55
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6.4 Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) and Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) ............................................. 57
6.5 Electroslag Welding (ESW) and Electrogas Welding (EGW) .................................................................. 57
7. Qualification ...................................................................................................................................................... 59
Part A, General Requirements........................................................................................................................... 59
7.1 Approved Procedures ............................................................................................................................... 59
7.2 Other Procedures ...................................................................................................................................... 60
7.3 Welders. Welding Operators, and Tack Welders ...................................................................................... 60
7.4 Qualification Responsibility ..................................................................................................................... 60
Part B. Procedure Qualification......................................................................................................................... 60
7.5 Qualification of Welding Procedures ....................................................................................................... 60
7.6 Types of Tests and Purposes ..................................................................................................................... 66
7.7 Base Metal ................................................................................................................................................ 66
7.8 Position of Test Welds .............................................................................................................................. 66
7.9 Joint Welding Procedure........................................................................................................................... 67
7.10 Test Specimens ......................................................................................................................................... 69
7.11 Method of Testing Specimens .................................................................................................................. 73
7.12 Test Results Required ............................................................................................................................... 76
7.13 Records ..................................................................................................................................................... 79
7.14 Retests....................................................................................................................................................... 79
Part C. Welder Qualification .............................................................................................................................. 79
7.15 General ..................................................................................................................................................... 79
7.16 Limitations ................................................................................................................................................ 80
7.17 Qualification Tests Required .................................................................................................................... 80
7.18 Groove Weld Plate QualificationTest for Plate of Unlimited Thickness................................................. 80
7.19 Groove Weld Plate QualificationTest for Plate of Limited Thickness .................................................... 81
7.20 Groove Weld Qualification Test for Butt Joints in Pipe or Tubing .......................................................... 81
7.2 1 Groove Weld Qualification Test for T-. Y-. and K-Connections on Pipe or Tubing ................................ 81
7.22 Fillet Weld Qualification Test................................................................................................................... 81
7.23 Position of Test Welds .............................................................................................................................. 83
7.24 Base Metal ................................................................................................................................................ 83
7.25 Joint Welding Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 83
7.26 Test Specimens ......................................................................................................................................... 87
7.28 Test Results Required ............................................................................................................................... 91
7.29 Retests....................................................................................................................................................... 92
7.30 Period of Effectiveness............................................................................................................................. 92
7.3 1 Records ..................................................................................................................................................... 92
7.32 Workmanship Qualification...................................................................................................................... 92
Part D. Welding Operator Qualification............................................................................................................. 94
7.33 General .................................................................................................................................................... -94
7.34 Limitations ................................................................................................................................................ 94
vi
STD AWS . 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0 5 0 9 5 3 3 9bLI D
Page No.
7.36 Base Metal ................................................................................................................................................ 95
7.37 Joint Welding Procedure........................................................................................................................... 95
7.38 Test Specimens ......................................................................................................................................... 95
7.40 Test Results Required............................................................................................................................... 97
7.41 Retests ....................................................................................................................................................... 99
7.42 Period of Effectiveness ............................................................................................................................. 99
7.43 Records ..................................................................................................................................................... 99
Part E, Qualificationof Tack Welders ................................................................................................................ 99
7.44 General ..................................................................................................................................................... 99
7.45 Limitations................................................................................................................................................ 99
7.47 Base Metal ................................................................................................................................................ 99
7.48 Test Specimen ........................................................................................................................................... 99
7.49 Method of Testing..................................................................................................................................... 99
7.50 Test Results Required............................................................................................................................... 99
7.51 Retests ..................................................................................................................................................... 100
7.52 Period of Effectiveness........................................................................................................................... 100
7.53 Records ................................................................................................................................................... 100
8. Weld Quality und Inspection ............................................................................................................................ 100
8.1 General ................................................................................................................................................... 100
8.2 Purchaser’s Representative..................................................................................................................... 101
8.3 Inspection of Welding Procedure Qualifications.................................................................................... 101
8.4 Inspection of Welder, Tack Welder, and Welding Operator Qualifications............................................ 101
8.5 Inspection of Work and Records ............................................................................................................ 101
8.6 Visual Examination ................................................................................................................................ 101
8.7 Welding Profiles ..................................................................................................................................... 102
8.8 NondestructiveExamination .................................................................................................................. 102
8.9 Radiographic Examination of Welds ...................................................................................................... 102
8.10 Radiographic Procedure ......................................................................................................................... 104
8.1 1 Acceptability of Radiographed Welds .................................................................................................... 105
8.12 Examination, Report, and Disposition of Radiographs .......................................................................... 106
8.13 Ultrasonic Examination of Welds ........................................................................................................... 106
8.14 Ultrasonic Testing Equipment and Calibration ...................................................................................... 106
8.15 Ultrasonic Testing Procedure, Acceptance Criteria.and Reports .......................................................... 109
8.16 Magnetic Particle Examination of Welds ............................................................................................... 113
8 . I7 Liquid Penetrant Examination of Welds ................................................................................................. 114
Modification
Weld 9. und
Field Repair ................................................................................................................ 114
9.1 General ................................................................................................................................................... 114
9.2 Field Repair-Manufacturer’s Responsibility ....................................................................................... 114
9.3 Field Repair-Purchaser’s Responsibility ............................................................................................. 115
10. Repair und Correction of Defects .................................................................................................................... 116
10.1 Weld Repairs ........................................................................................................................................... 116
10.2 Base Metal Repairs ................................................................................................................................. 116
10.3 Removal of Defective Areas .................................................................................................................. 116
10.4 Distortion and Camber ........................................................................................................................... 116
10.5 Correction of Improperly Fitted and Welded Members ......................................................................... 116
Annex A-suggested Forms ..................................................................................................................................... 117
Annex B-Commonly Used Metric Conversions...................................................................................................... 127
Annex C-Examples of Weld Quulio Requirements ................................................................................................. 129
Document List .......................................................................................................................................................... 131
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
vii
S T D - A W S D14.L-ENGL L997 m 07842b5 0509534 8 T O m
List of Tables
Table Page No .
1 Weldability Classification of Steels ............................................................................................................... 4
2 Allowable Stressin Weld Metal ..................................................................................................................... 7
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3 Allowable Stress Range,ksi (MPa) ............................................................................................................... 8

4 Stress Categoriesto Determine Allowable Stress Range ............................................................................... 9
5 Minimum Effective Throatfor Partial Joint Penetration GrooveWelds ..................................................... 14
6 Minimum FilletWeld Size ........................................................................................................................... 15
7 Limits on Acceptability and Repair of Edge Discontinuitiesin Plate ......................................................... 48
8 Tolerances For Groove Weld Joint Preparations forArc Welding............................................................... 49
9 Matching Filler Metal Requirements ........................................................................................................... 53
10 Minimum Preheat and Interpass Temperature ............................................................................................. 54
11 Impact Strength Requirements for Electrogas and Electroslag Welds ......................................................... 58
12 All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements for Electrogasand Electroslag Welds .................................... 59
13 Number and Type of Test Specimens andRange of Thickness Qualified-Procedure Qualification;
Complete Joint Penetration GrooveWelds .................................................................................................. 70
14 Procedure Qualification-Type and Position Limitations........................................................................... 79
15 Acceptable Reinforcement on Groove Welds in Pipe and Tubing ............................................................... 79
16 SMAW Electrode Groups ............................................................................................................................ 80
17 Welder Qualification-Type and Position Limitations ................................................................................ 81
18 Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified-Welder and
Welding Operator Qualification................................................................................................................... 82
19 Penetrameter Requirements....................................................................................................................... 104
20 Testing Angle ............................................................................................................................................. 111
21 Ultrasonic Acceptance-Rejection Criteria ................................................................................................. 115
...
v111
List of Figures
Figure Page No.
1 Illustrative Examples forTable 4 ................................................................................................................. 12
2 Fillet and Combined Weld Dimension ......................................................................................................... 14
3 Size and Effective Throat of Fillet and Combination Groove-FilletWelds ................................................. 15
4 Staggered Intermittent FilletWeld ............................................................................................................... 16
5 Classification of Welded Joints .................................................................................................................... 18
6 Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints ................................................................. 20
7 Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration GrooveWelded Joints ...................................................................... 35
8 Transition of Butt Joints in Parts of Unequal Thickness.............................................................................. 44
9 Transition of Width at Butt Joints of Parts HavingUnequal Width ............................................................. 45
10 Edge Discontinuitiesin Cut Plate................................................................................................................ 48
11 Pneumatic Hammer Peening ........................................................................................................................ 52
12 Unacceptable SubmergedArc Weld Pass Where the Depth and Width Exceed the Face Width ................55
13A Transverse FilletWeld Shear Specimen....................................................................................................... 61
13B Longitudinal FilletWeld Shear Specimen................................................................................................... 62
14 Positions of Test Plates for GrooveWelds ................................................................................................... 67
15 Positions of Test Pipe or Tubing for GrooveWelds ..................................................................................... 68
16 Positions of Test Plates for FilletWelds ...................................................................................................... 69
17A Location of Test Specimens on Welded TestPipe 2 in . or 3 in . in Diameter ............................................... 72
17B Location of Test Specimens on Welded TestPipe 6 in . or 8 in . in Diameter ............................................... 72
17C Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plate-Electroslag and Electrogas Welding-
Procedure Qualification............................................................................................................................... 72
17D Location of Test Specimens on Welded TestPlate Over 3/8 in . Thick-Procedure Qualification..............73
17E Location of Test Specimens on Welded TestPlate 3/8 in . Thick-Procedure Qualification....................... 74
18A Reduced-Section Tension Specimens .......................................................................................................... 75
18B All-Weld-Metal Tension Specimens ............................................................................................................ 76
1SC Face- and Root-Bend Specimens................................................................................................................. 77
18D Side-Bend Specimens.................................................................................................................................. 78
19 Fillet Weld Soundness Test for Procedure Qualification............................................................................. 78
20A Test Plate for UnlimitedThickness-Welder Qualification ........................................................................ 84
20B Optional Test Plate for UnlimitedThickness-Horizontal Position-Welder Qualification ...................... 84
21A Test Plate forLimited Thickness-All Positions-Welder Qualification ................................................... 85
21B Optional Test Plate forLimited Thickness-Horizontal Position-Welder Qualification .......................... 85
22A Pipe Test Butt Joint-Welder Qualification-Without Backing ................................................................. 86
22B Pipe Test Butt Joint-Welder Qualification-With Backing ....................................................................... 86
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
23 Test joint for T-,Y-, and K- Connections on Pipe or Tubing-Welder Qualification................................. 86

24 Fillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test Plate-Welder Qualification-Option 1 ........................................ 87
25 Fillet Weld Root-Bend Test Plate-Welder Qualification-Option 2 ......................................................... 88
26 Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Pipe-Welder Qualification.................................................. 89
27A Guided-Bend Test Jig ................................................................................................................................... 90
27B Alternative Wraparound Guided-Bend Test Jig ........................................................................................... 91
27C Alternative Roller-Equipped Guided-BendTest Jig for Bottom Ejection of Test Specimen ...................... 92
28 Examples of Workmanship Samples............................................................................................................ 93
29 Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness-Welding Operator Qualification....................................................... 95
30 Butt Joint for Electroslagand Electrogas-Welding Operator Qualification.............................................. 96
31 Fillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test Plate-Option 1-Welding Operator Qualification....................... 97
ix
Figure Page No.
32. Fillet Weld Root-Bend Test Plate-Option 2-Welding Operator Qualification........................................ 98
33 . Fillet Weld Break Specimen-Tack Welder Qualification ........................................................................ 100
34. Method of Fracturing Specimen-Tack Welder Qualification .................................................................. 100
35. Acceptable and Unacceptable Weld Profiles ............................................................................................. 103
36. Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Welds (Limitation of Porosity
and Fusion-Type Discontinuities) .............................................................................................................. 105
37A . RC-Resolution Reference Block ............................................................................................................. 107
37B. Transducer Positions (Typical)................................................................................................................... 108
38 . Plan View of UT Scanning Patterns ........................................................................................................... 113
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- X
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Specification for
Welding of Industrial andMill Cranes
and Other Material Handling Equipment
Scope (1) Welding, as defined in the Scope, in accordance

with this specification
This specification applies to the welding of all princi- (2) Producing the welds designated on the drawings
pal structural weldments and all primary welds used in by appropriate welding symbols and notes containing
the manufacture of cranes for industrial, mill, power sufficient detail to show joint preparations compatible
house, and nuclear facilities. It also appliesto other over- with the designated welding processes
head material handling machinery and equipment that (3) Providing written welding procedures
support and transport loads within the design rating, ver- (4) Recording results of all procedure and welder
tically or horizontally, during normal operations. It also qualification tests
applies, when agreed upon between the purchaser and (5) Controlling the use of designated base metals and
manufacturer, to loading caused by abnormal operations consumables
or environmental events, such as seismicloading. ( 6 )Inspecting the welds to the requirements of this
Secondary welds that will be subjected to stresses of specification
less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa)' need only meet the 1.1 Acceptance. Acceptance shall be as agreed upon
requirements of Section 5 , Workmanship, and Section 8, between the manufacturer and the purchaser. The fun-
Weld Quality and Inspection. The engineering drawings damental premise of the code is to provide general
shall specify the joint detail, type, and size of weld. This stipulations applicable to most situations. Acceptance
specification is not intended for application to construc- criteria for production welds different from those speci-
tion- or crawler-type cranes. For the welding of rails, fied in the code may be used for a particular application,
refer to ANSIIAWS D15.2-93, Recommended Practice provided they are suitably documented by the proposer
for the Welding of Rails and Related Rail Components and approved by the Engineer. These alternate accep-
for Use by Rail Vehicles. tance criteria can be basedupon evaluation of suitability
A11 provisions of this specification are equally applicable for service using past experience, experimental evidence
to the strengthening and repairing of existing overhead or engineering analysis considering material type,
cranes and material handling equipmentas described above. service-load effects, and environmental factors.
1.2 Definitions. The terms that follow are defined for the
1. General Provisions purposes of this specification. Other terms used in this
specification are defined in ANSUAWS A3.0, Stnndurd
The manufacturer's* adherence to this specification Welding Terms und Definitions, latest edition.
shall include responsibility for the following:
1.2.1 Principal Structural Weldments. Those weld-
ments that carry the main working loads during normal
1. The primary units in this specification are U.S. Customary operations.
Units. Approximate conversions to SI are given in parentheses
throughout the specification. 1.2.2 Primary Welds. Welds, the failure of which
2. Manufacturer meanç the organization responsible for the per- would result in ( 1 ) a carried load being dropped in excess
formance of the work covered by this specification. of 4 in. (101.6 mm) or ( 2 ) an increase of stress beyond
1
2
the allowable stress limits, as defined in Section 3, Al- ANSYAWS A5.1 Specification for Carbon Steel
lowable Stresses, in other welds or base metal. Any Electrodes f o r Shielded Metal Arc
welds subject to only compressive stresses are not con- Welding
sidered primary. ANSVAWS A5.5 Specification f o r Low Alloy Steel
Electrodes f o r Shielded Metal Arc
1.2.3 Secondary Welds. Secondary welds are those
Welding
welds not covered by the requirements of 1.2.2 and shall
ANSVAWS A5.17 Specification f o r Carbon Steel Elec-
be noted as such on the drawings. Theymust carry com-
trodes and Fluxesf o r Submerged
pressive stress onlyor be subjected to a stress
of less than
Arc Welding
5000 psi (34.5 MPa).
ANSYAWS A5.18 Spec$cation for Carbon Steel Elec-
Secondary welds only need to meet the requirements
trodes and Rodsfor GasShielded
of Section 5 , Workmanship, and Section8, Weld Quality
Arc Welding
and Inspection.
ANSVAWS A5.20 Specification for Carbon Steel Elec-
1.2.4 Tensile Strengthof the Weld Metal. The mini- trodesfor Flux Cored Arc Welding
mum tensile strength specified for the filler metal classi- ANSYAWS A5.23 Specification for Low Alloy Steel
fication as published in the applicable filler metal Electrodes and Fluxes for Sub-
specification. merged Arc Welding
1.2.5 Engineer.The responsible technical authority. ANSVAWS A5.25 Specification f o r Carbon and Low
Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes
1.3 Welding Symbols. Welding symbols used on shop for Electroslag Welding
drawings shall be those shown in the latest edition of ANSVAWS A5.26 Specification f o r Carbon and Low
ANSVAWS A2.4, Standard Symbols f o r Welding, Braz- Alloy Steel Electrodesf o r Electro-
ing, and Nondestructive Examination. Special require- gas Welding
ments shall be fully explainedby added notes or details. ANSYAWS A5.28 Specification for Low Alloy Steel
1.4 Mechanical Testing of Welds. Methods used in the Filler Metalsf o r Gas Shielded Arc
mechanical testing of welds shall be those described in Welding
the latest editionof ANSVAWS B4.0, Standard Methods ANSVAWS A5.29 Specification f o r Low Alloy Steel
for Mechanical Testing of Welds. When there is a conflict Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc
between this specification andANSUAWS B4.0, thepro- Welding
visions of this specification shall govern. ANSVAWS B2.1 Specification for Welding Procedure
and Pelformance Qualification
1.5 Filler Metal Specifications. All welding consum- ANSVAWS B4.0 Standard Methodsf o r Mechanical
ables must meet the requirements of the applicable AWS Testing of Welds
filler metal specifications, except for specific require- ANSVAWS C3.2 Standard Methodf o r Evaluating the
ments of this specification. Strength of Brazed Jointsin Shear
1.6 Safety Precautions. Safety precautions shall con- AWS C4.1 Oxygen Cutting Sulface Roughness
form to the latest editionof ANSYASC 249.1, Safety in Gauge
Welding, Cutting,and Allied Processes, published by the ANSYAWS D 1.1 Structural Welding Code-Steel
American Welding Society. ANSYAWS QC-1 Standard f o r AWS Certification of
Welding Inspectors
1.7 Applicable Documents.Where specified,the follow- ASME IX Qualification Standardf o r Welding
ing standards apply and become a partof this specifica- and Brazing Procedures, Welders,
tion. When there is a conflict between this specification Brazers, and Welding and Brazing
and the specified document, the provisionsof this specifi-
Operators
cation shall govern. ASNT Recommended Practices, SNT-
ANSVASC 249.1 Safety in Welding, Cutting, and TC- 1 A
Allied Processes ASTM A435 Specification f o r Straight-Beam (II-
ANSYASME B46.1 Sulface Texture trasonic Examination of Steel
ANSYAWS A2.4 Standard Symbolsfor Welding, Braz- Plates
ing, and NondestructiveExamination ASTM E23 Test Methods f o r Notched Bar Im-
ANSYAWS A3.0 S t a n d a r d W e l d i n g T e r m s a n d pact Testingof Metallic Materials
Definitions ASTM E94 Guide f o r Radiographic Testing
ANSVAWS A5.01 Filler Metal Procurement Guide- ASTM E 142 Method f o r Controlling the Quality
lines of Radiographic Testing
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3
ASTM E 164 Practice for UltrasonicContact Ex- metal specification does not establish the minimum ten-
amination of Weldments sile and yield strengths for acceptance, the manufacturer
ASTM E 165 Test Method for LiquidPenetrant shall establish the minimum tensile and yield strengths
Examination for design purposes. The documentation may be in the
ASTM E3 17 Practicefor Evaluating Perform- form of references to published data or compilations of
ance Characteristics of Ultrasonic test data. In the establishment of minimum tensile and
Pulse-Echo Testing Systems without yield strengths for design purposes, due regard shall be
the Use of ElectronicMeasurement made for size effects, thermalor mechanical treatments,
Instruments and the effectof the welding processon the base material
ASTM E500 Definitions of Terms Relating to in the heat-affected zone.
Ultrasonic Testing 2.4 Weldability. Steel base metals listed in Table 1 shall
ASTM E709 G u i dfeoM
r a g n e t iPc a r t i c l e be considered weldable without separate qualification,
Examination except base metals with a minimum yield strength of
ASTM E1316 Terminology for Nondestructive 90 O00 psi (620 MPa) or higher (see 7.1.1). Combina-
Examination tions of any of these steel base metals may be welded to-
CSA
W178.2 Certification of Welding Inspectors gether without qualification. The steels listed in Table 1
Sources of these documents arethe following: are classified into groups according to the degreeof diffi-
culty encountered during welding related to chemical
American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, composition, rolling condition, or heat treatment. Steels
Miami, FL 33 126 in the higher classifications require greater precautions
American Society forTesting and Materials (ASTM),100 during welding, such as preheat, limited heat input, or
Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, Pennsyl- other precautions to ensure sound weldments. When
vania 19428-2959 welding combinationsof these steels, precautionsrelated
American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd to the steel with the higher classification number should
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Street, New York, NY 10036 be observed.

American Society for Nondestructive Testing, 1711 Ar-
2.5 Quenched and Tempered Steels. Quenched and
lingate Lane, Columbus, Ohio 43228
tempered steels may be used where design and other fac-
Canadian Standards Association, 178 Rexdale Blvd.,
tors permit or require them. Their use shall be compati-
Toronto, Ontario, M9W 1R3,Canada
ble with their mechanical properties and the design
requirements as documented by the equipment manufac-
turer. Documentation may be in either of two forms:
2. Base Metals (1) An acceptable service historyproving reliability
2.1 Specifications. All ferrous and nonferrous metals, (2) Welding procedure development data establishing
structural steel, steel castings, forgings, and any other the expected service life of the steel according to ac-
metals used in the fabrication by welding of all compo- cepted engineering criteria for the application.
nents for overhead material handling machinery and 2.6 Nonferrous Metals.Nonferrous metals that meet the
equipment must be identified by a specification. Com- requirements of an accepted specification, as described
mon industry-wide specifications from organizations in 2.1, may be used in the fabrication of components by
such as the American Society for Testing and Materials welding. Proper documentation in the form of welding
(ASTM), the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), procedures and other experimental data shallbe provided
and the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE),or writ- by the manufacturerusing such metals.
ten proprietary specifications developedby an individual
equipment manufacturer,may be used.
2.2 Proprietary Base Metals. The weldabilityof and the 3. Allowable Stresses
procedure for welding (1) base metals covered by a spe-
3.1 General. The allowable stresses for base metal and
cific equipment manufacturer's proprietary specification,
weld metal and the type of fatigue analysis to be used
(2) steelsnot listed in Table 1, or (3) base metals not cov-
shall conform to the requirements of the design specifi-
ered by accepted national specifications, shall be estab-
cations, from organizations such as the American Insti-
lished by qualification, except asprovided for in 2.4.
tute of Steel Construction (AISC), the AmericanSociety
2.3 Tensile and Yield Strengths of a Base Metal. The of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), the Crane Manufac-
minimum specified tensile and yield strengths for base turers Association of America (CMAA), or theMonorail
metals are listed in Table 1. When Table 1 or the base Manufacturers Association (MMA). In the absence of
4
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table 1
Weldability Classification of Steels
Materiz
Classa
I
T
AISYSAE
Steel
Specification and Grade T Tensile
Strength
ksi (MPa)
b, d,f
Yield
Strength
ksi (MPa)
b, f
1005 Sheet, Plate Hot Rolled 42 (290) 23.5 (162)
1006 Bar or Casting Hot Rolled 43 (295) 24 (165)
1008 (Usually Specified by Composition Hot Rolled 44 (305) 24.5 (170)
1010 Only-without Mechanical Properties) Hot Rolled 47 (325) 26 ( 180)
1012 Hot Rolled 48 (330) 26.5 (183)
1013 Hot Rolled 49 (338) 27 (186)
1015 Hot Rolled 50 (345) 27.5 (190)
1016 Hot Rolled 55 (380) 30 (205)
1017 Hot Rolled 53 (365) 29 (200)
1018 Hot Rolled 58 (499) 32 (220)
1020 Hot Rolled 55 (320) 30 (205)
1021 Hot Rolled 61 (420) 33 (230)
1025 Hot Rolled 58 (400) 32 (220)
II ASTM C C
A27 Grade N-1 Castings Chemistry Only got Specified-See 2.3 Not Specified-See 2.3
Grade 60-30 60 (4 15) 30 (205)
Grade 65-35 65 (450) 35 (240)
A36 Shapes, Plate,Bar 58-80 (400-550) 36 (250)
A53 Grade B Pipe 60 (4 15) 35 (240)
A106 Grade B Pipe 60 (415) 35 (240)
A131 Grade A, B,D, CS, DS 58-7 1 (400490) 34 (235)
Ship Building Shapes, Plate, Bars
I
A139 Grade A Pipe 48 (331) 30 (241)
Grade B 60 (414) 35 (241)
Grade C I 60 (4 14) 42 (290)
Grade D 60 (414) 46 (317)
Grade E 66 (455) 52 (359)
A284 Grade C through 2 in.(50 mm) Plate 60 (4 15) 30 (205)
Grade D through 1 in. (25 mm) 60 (415) 33 (230)
A38 1 Grade Y35 Pipe 60 (414) 35 (241)
A500 Grade A Tubing 45 (310) 33 (288)
Grade B 58 (400) 42 (290)
4501 Tubing 58 (400) 36 (250)
A515 Grade 55 through 8 in. (200mm) Plate 55-75 (380-515) 30 (241)
A5 16 Grade 55 through 8 in. (200mm) Plate 55-75 (380-515) 30 (241)
Grade 60 through 8 in. (200 mm) Plate 60-80 (415-550) 32 (220)
A524 Grade I through .375 in. (95 mm) Pipe 60-85 (414-586) 35 (240)
Grade II Above .375 in. (95 mm) Pipe 55-80 (380-550) 30 (205)
A570 Grade 36 Sheet to ,229 in. mm)(6 53 (380) 36 (250)
A573 Grade 58 Plate to 1.5 in. (40 mm) 58-7 1 (400-490) 32 (220)
Grade 65 Plate to1.5 in. (40mm) 65-77 (450-530) 35 (240)
A662 Grade A Plate to 1.5 in.(40mm) 58-78 (400-540) 40 (275)
Grade B Plate to 1.5 in. (40mm) 65-85 (450-585) 40 (275)
A709 Grade 36 Shapes, Plate,Bar 58-80 (400-550) 36 (250)
APIg
5L Grade B Pipe "
60 (410) 35 (240)
III AISYSAE b, e b. f
1030 Sheet, Plate,Bar or Casting 68 (470) 37.5 (260)
(Usually Specified by Composition Only--
without Mechanical Properties) -
(Continued)
5
Table 1 (Continued)
Materia
Classa
III STM
Steel
Specification and Grade
r Tensile
Strength
ksi (MPa)
C
Yield
Strength
ksi (MPa)
C
(Cont’d 127 hade N-2 Castings Heat Treated ot Specified-See 2.3 lot Specified-See 2.3
?.rade 70-36 70 (485) 36 (250)
?.rade 70-40 70 (485) 40 (275)
~106 hade C Pipe 70 (485) 40 (275)
1131 :rade AH32, DH32, EH32 68-85 (470-585) 46 (3 IS)
YH36, DH36, EH36 7 1-90 (490-620) 51 (360)
Ship Building Shapes, Plate, Bars
i284 ;rade C > 2 4 in. (>100-200 mm) Plate 60 (415) 30 (205)
3ade D > 2 4 in. (> 100-200 mm) Plate 60 (415) 33 (230)
i500 ?rade C Round Tubing 62 (427) 46 (317)
?rade C Shaped Tubing 62 (427) 50 (345)
i5 15 3rade 60 through 2 in.(50 mm) Plate 60-80 (415-550) 32 (220)
?rade 65 through 2 in.(50 mm) Plate 65-85 (450-585) 35 (240)
i5 16 3rade 60 through 2 in. (50 mm) Plate 60-80 (415-550) 32 (220)
3rade 65 through 2 in.(50 mm) Plate 65-85 (450-585) 35 (240)
i537 Yass 1 through 2.5 in. (65 mm) Plate 70-90 (485-620) 50 (345)
i572 Shapes, Plate, Sheet& Bar
HSLA Cb-Va Steels
Srade 42 to 2 in. (50 mm) 60 (415) 42 (290)
Grade 50 to .5 in. (1 3mm) 65 (450) 50 (345)
Grade 50 >.5 to 2 in. (>13 to SO mm)
Type I or 2 Killed Steel 65 (450) 50 (345)
4588 Grades A,B,C & K Shapes, Plate& Bar
4 in. (100 mm) and Under 70 (485) 50 (345)
4606 Type 2 & 4 Sheet to ,180 in. ( 5 mm)
Weathering Steel-As Rolled Cut Length 70 (485) 50 (345)
All Other Coils & Cut Lengths 65 (450) 45 (310)
4607 Type 1 Class2 Sheet to ,180 in.( 5 mm)
HSLA Non-Weathering Grade 45 60 (410) 45 (310)
Grade 50 65 (450) 50 (340)
4618 HSLA Structural Tubing
Wall to 3/4 in. (19 mm) Grade II 70 (485) 50 (345)
Wall >3/4 in. (19 mm) to 1.5 in. (38 mm) Grade II 67 (460) 46 (315)
Grade III 65 (450) 50 (345)
A633 HSLA Normalized Structural
Plate to 4 in.(100 mm) Grade A 63-83 (430-570) 42 (290)
through 2.5 in. (65 mm) Grades C & 1 70-90 (485-620) 50 (345)
> 2 . 5 4 in. (65-100 mm) Grades C & 1 65-85 (450-590) 46 (315)
A662 Grade B PV Plate Moderate & Low Tem1
65-85 (450-590) 40 (275)
Applications
A709 Structural Shapes, Plate, Bars-Bridges
Non-Weathering Grade 50 65 (450) 50 (345)
Weathering Grade 50W 70 (485) 50 (345)
APIg
__ 5LX Grade 42 High-Strength Pipe 60 (4I O) 42 (290)
IV ASTM C C
A284 Grade C 9 - 1 2 in. (100-300 mm) Plate 60 (415) 30 (205)
Grade D r4-8 in. (100-200 mm) Plate 60 (415 ) 33 (230)
A515 Grade 60 Over 2 in.(50 mm) Plate 60-80 (415-550) 32 (220)
Grade 65 Over 2 in.(50 mm) Plate 65-85 (450-585) 35 (240)
A516 Grade 60 Over 2 in.(50 mm) Plate 60-80 (415-550) 32 (220)
(Continued)
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
STD*AWS DLq-1-ENGL
6
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table 1 (Continued)
Tensile Yield
Materia Steel Strength Strength
Classa Specification and Grade ksi (MPa) ksi (MPa)
IV Grade 65 Over 2 in. (50 mm) Plate 65-85 (450-585) 35 (240)
(Cont’d A537 Class 2 through 2.5 in. (65 mm)Plate 80-100 (550-690) 60 (4 15)
A572 Shapes, Plate, Sheet& Bar
Grade 60 to 1.25 in. (32 mm) 75 (520) 60 (415)
Grade 65 to 1.25 in. (32 mm) 80 (550) 65 (450)
A607 HSLA Non-Weathering Grade 60 75 (520) 60 (410)
Grade 65 80 (550) 65 (450)
A633 HSLA Normalized Structural Plate
through 4 in. (100 mm) Grade E 80-100 (550-690) 60 (415)
>4-6 in. (100-150 mm) Grade E 80-100 (550-690) 55 (380)
V ASTM C C
A514 HSLA Q&T Plate to2.5 in. (65 mm) 110-130 (760-895) 100 (690)
>2.5-6 in. (65-150 mm) 100-130 (690-895) 90 (620)
A5 17 HSLA Q&T PV Plate to2.5 in. (65 mm) 110-130 (760-895) 100 (690)
>2.5-6 in. (65-150 mm) 100-130 (690-895) 90 (620)
A709 HSLA Q&T Plate to2.5 in. (65 mm) 110-130 (760-895) 100 (690)
Grades 100 & 100 W >2.54in.
100-130 (690-895) 90 (620)
(65-150 mm)
Notes:
a. Material Class I steels are the most weldable, and Material Class V steel the most difficult to weld of the steels listed.
b. All tensile andyield strength valuesfor AISYSAE steels are estimated minimum values.
c. All tensile andyield strength values listed forASTM steels are specifiedby the ASTM Standard.
d. Hardness is not to exceed 160 Brinell for the AISVSAE steels listed underWeldability Class I. These sameAISYSAE steels should be placed in a
higher Weldability Class when hardness exceeds160 Brinell (ultimate strength greaterthan 80 O00 psi.)
e. Hardness is not to exceed 180 Brinell for the AISYSAE steel listed under Weldability Class III. This same AISYSAE steelshould be placed in a
higher Weldability Class when hardness exceeds180 Brinell (ultimate strength greater than 90O00 psi.)
f. See 2.3 for tensile-yield property determination forAISYSAE steels.
.g. API-American Petroleum Institute.
other requirements, the allowable stresses in the base that allowed by 3.1 and the stress range doesnot exceed
metal and the weld metal shall conform to the following the value given in Table 3 for the applicable stress cate-
requirements. gory and nominal number of loading cycles. Stress cate-
gories for weld joint configurations are described in
3.1.1 Base Metal. Unless otherwise specifiedby the
Table 4 and illustrated in Figure 1.
design specifications in 3.1, the allowable tensile or com-
pressive stressin the basemetal shall be 50 percent of the 3.2.2 The stress range is the maximum stress minus
yield strength, and the allowable shear stressin the base the minimum stress. The minimum stress is considered
metal shall be 40 percent of the yield strength for mem- negative if it is opposite in direction to the maximum
bers not controlled by buckling. stress. Thenominal number of loading cycles shall be the
3.1.2 Weld Metal. Allowable stresses in the weld number defined in the design specification for the duty
metal shall conform toTable 2. cycle class or determined by the Engineer for the duty
cycle and life specifiedin the purchase contract.
3.2 Fatigue. The maximum stress in welded joints sub-
ject to repeated stress fluctuations or reversals shall
not
exceed (1) the allowable tensile or compressive stress in
3.1 or (2) the allowable fatigue stress as defined in the 4. Weld Joint Design
design specifications indicated in 3.1. In the absence of
4.1 General Requirements. Complete information re-
other requirements, fatigue loading shallbe addressed as
garding location, type, size, and extent of all welds and
follows:
welded joints shallbe shown on the drawings. Any spe-
3.2.1 Members subject to repeated loading shall be cial inspection requirements shallbe noted on the draw-
designed so that the maximum stress does not exceed ings or other appropriate documents. In general, design
7
Table 2
Allowable Stress in Weld Metal
Required Weld
Type of Weld Stress in Welda Allowable Stress Strength Levelb
Complete joint TensionnormaltotheeffectiveareaSameasbasemetal datching weld metal must
penetration groove le used.
welds (Joint Class
I, II, III, or IV) Compression normal to the effective I Same as base metal Veld metal with a strength
area eve1 equal toor one classifi-
ation (10 ksi) [69 MPa] less
han matching weld metal
nay be used.
Tension or compressionparalleltoSameasbasemetal Veld metal with a strength
the axis of the weld eve1 equalto orless than
natching weld metal may
Shear on the effective area 0.27 times nominal tensile strength ,e used.
of weld metal, except shear stress on
base metal shall not exceed 0.36
times yield strength of base metal.
Partial joint Compression normal to Weld
0.45 times nominal tensile strength Joint notmetal with a strength
penetration groove effective area designed of weld metal, except shear stress on eve1 equalto or less than
welds (Joint Class to bear base metal shall not exceed 0.55 natching weld metal may
IV or V) times yield strength of base metal. ,e used.
Joint Same as base metal
designed
to bear
Tension or compression parallel to Same as base metal
the axis of the weldC
Shear parallel to axis of metal 0.27 times nominal tensile strength
of weld metal, except shear stress on
base metal shallnot exceed 0.36
Tension normal to effective area 0.27 times nominal tensile strength
of weld metal, except tensile stress
on base metal shall not exceed 0.55
Fillet welds Shear on effective area 0.27 times nominal tensile strength Weld metal with a strength
(Joint Class IV, V, of weld metal, except shear stress onlevel equal toor less than
or VI) base metal shall not exceed0.36 matching weld metal may
times yield strength of base metal. be used.
Tension or compression parallel to Same as base metal
axis of weldC
Plug and slot welds Shear parallel to faying surfaces 0.27 times nominal tensile strength Weld metal with a strength
(Joint Class V or VI (on effective area) of weld metal, except shear stress on level equal to or less than
base metal shall not exceed0.36 matching weld metal may
times yield strength of base metal. be used.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Notes:
a. For definitions of effective area, see 4.2,4.4,and 4.7.
b. For matching weld metal, see Table 9.
c. Fillet welds and partial joint penetration groove welds joining the component elements of built-up members, such as flange-to-web connections,
may be designed without regard to the tensde or compressive streFs in these elements parallel to the axis of the welds.
8
Table 3
Allowable StressRange, ksi (MPa)a
Nominal Number of Loading Cycles
Stress Category
(From Table204) 000 to 100 OOOb 100000to500000 500000to2000000 Over 2 O00 O00
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A (435) 63 37 (255) 24 (165) 24 (1 65)

B 49 (340) 29 (200) 18 (125) 16 (110)
B' 39 (270) 23 (160) 15 (100) 12 (80)
C 35 (240) 21 (145) 13 (90) 10 (70)'
D 28 ( 190) 16(110) 10 (70) 7 (50)
E (150) 22 13 (90) 8 (55) 5 (34)
E (110) 16 9 (60) 6 (40) 3 (20)
F 15 (100) 12 (80) 9 (60) 8 (55)
Notes:
a. Stress range is defined as the algebraic difference between the maximum stress and the minimum stress. Tension stress is considered to have the
opposite algebraic sign from the compression stress.
b. For the 20 o00 loading cycles, use the allowable stress for static loading in accordance with 3.1.1.
c. Flexural stress range of 12 ksi (80 MPa) permitted at toe of stiffener welds or flanges.
details should minimize restraint, avoid undue concen- is fused to the base metal throughout its total thickness
tration of welding, and afford ample access for deposit- (see 4.9).
ing the weld metal.
4.3 Intermittent Groove Welds. Intermittent groove
4.2 Groove Welds welds are prohibited, exceptin secondary members.
4.2.1 The effective area of a full penetration weld 4.4 Fillet Welds(See Figure2.)
.shall bethe effective weldlength multiplied by the effec- 4.4.1 The minimum fillet weld size shall beas shown
tive throat. in Table 6, except where filletwelds are used to reinforce
4.2.2 The effective length of any groove weld is the groove welds (see Figure3).
length throughout which the correctly proportioned weld 4.4.2 The maximum fillet weld size permitted along
cross section exists. the edges of members shall be:
4.2.3 The effective throat is the minimum distance (1) The thicknessof the base metal when the metal is
from the root of a weld to its face, less any reinforce- less than 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) thick.
ment. For a complete joint penetration weld, this shall be (2) The thickness of the base metal less 1/16 in.
the nominal thickness of the thinner part joined. (1.6 mm) when the metal is 114 in. (6.4 mm) or more in
thickness, unless the weld is designated on the drawing
4.2.4 The effective throat of partial
a penetration weld to be built out to obtain full throat
thickness.
is joint penetration below the surface of the member.
(See Table 5 for the minimum effectivethroat required.) 4.4.3 The effective weld area shall be the effective
Shop or working drawings shall specify the groove weld length multiplied by the effective throat. The shear
depths (S) applicable for the weld size (E) required for stress in a fillet weld shall be considered as applied to
the welding process and position of welding to be used. this effective area regardless of the directionof applied
load. The effective length of a fillet weld shall be the
4.2.5 Groove welds made from one sideonly, except overall length of the full size fillet,
including boxing (end
in secondary members, are prohibited unless they are returns).
completely fused to a backing strip, or qualifiedin ac-
cordance with the requirements of this specification 4.4.4 Fillet welds terminated at ends or sidesof parts
(see 4.9). or members shall,wherever practicable, be returned con-
tinuously around the comers for a distance at least twice
4.2.6 A complete jointpenetration groove weld is one the nominal size of the weld where such return can be
that has been welded from both sides,or from one side, made in the same plane. Fillet welds deposited on othe p
in which the weld metal completely fills the groove and posite sides of a common plane of contact between two
9
Table 4
~~
Stress Categoriesto Determine All01 lble Stress lange
Stress Illustrative
Kind of Category 3xample Numbers
General Condition Situation Stressa (see Table3) (See Figure I ) b
Plain Material 3ase metal with rolled or cleaned surface. Flame-cut T or Rev. A 1.2
dges with ANSI smoothness of lo00 or less
Built-up Members 3ase metal and weld metal in members without T or Rev. B 3,4,5.6
ittachments, built-up platesor shapes connected by
:ontinuous fillet welds parallel to the direction
of
ipplied stress
3ase metal and weld metal in members without T or Rev. B‘ 3,4,5,6
ittachments, built-up plates,or shapes connected by
:omplete joint penetration groove welds with backing
~arsnot removed, or by partial joint penetration groove
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
welds parallel to the direction of applied stress

Base metal at toe of welds on girder websor flanges T or Rev. C 7
fdjacent to welded transverse stiffeners
Base metal at ends of partial length welded coverplates
narrower than the flange having squareor tapered ends,
with or without welds across thesends or wider than
flange with welds across the ends
Flange thickness10.8in. T or Rev. E 5
Flange thickness>0.8 in. T or Rev. E‘ 5
Base metal at end of partial length welded coverplates E‘ 5
wider than the flange without welds across the ends
Groove Welds Base metal and weld metal at complete joint penetration T or Rev. B IO. 11
groove welded splices of parts of similar cross section
ground flush, with grinding in the direction of applied
stress and with weld soundness established by radio-
graphic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance with the
requirements of Section 8.
Base metal and weld metal at complete joint penetration
groove welded splices at transitions in widthor
thickness, with welds ground to provide slopes no
steeper than 1 to 2 with grinding in the direction of
applied stress, and with weld soundness established by
radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance with
the requirements of Section 8.
A5 14 base metal T or Rev. B‘ 12, 13
Other base metals T or Rev. B 12, 13
Base metal and weld metal at complete joint penetration T or Rev. C 10, 11, 12, 13
groove welded splices, with or without transitions
having slopes no greater than 1 to 2 when reinforcement
is not removed by weld soundness is established by
radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance with
the requirements of Section8.
Partial Joint Weld metalof partial joint penetration transverse groove T or Rev. 16
Penetration welds, based on effective throat area of the weld or
Groove Welds welds
(continued)
10
Table 4 (Continued)
stress Illustrative
Kind of Category Example Numbers
General Conditio1 Situation Stressa (see Table 3) (See Figure l)b
Fillet-welded Base metal at intermittent fillet welds T or Rev. E
Connections Base metal at junction of axially loaded members with
fillet-welded end connections. Welds shall be disposed
about the axis of the memberso as to balance weld
stresses
b I1 in. T or Rev. E 17,18
b > 1 in. T or Rev. E 17, 18
~
Base metal at members connected with transverse fillet

welds
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
b I1 in. T or Rev. CC 20,21
b > 1 in.
Fillet Welds Weld metal of continuousor intermittent longitudinal or S FC 15, 17, 18,20,21
transverse fillet welds
~ ~~
Plug or Slot Base metal at plugor slot welds T or Rev. E 27

Welds
Shear on plugor slot welds S F 27
Mechanically Base metal at cross section of high-strength bolted slip- T or Rev. 8
Fastened critical connections, except axially loaded joints which
Connections induce out-of-plane bending in connected material.
Base metal at net section of other mechanically fastened T or Rev. 8,9
joints
Base metal at net section of fully tensioned high- T or Rev. 8,9
strength, bolted bearing connections
Attachments Base metal at details attached by complete joint
penetration groove welds subjectto longitudinal andor
transverse loading when the detail embodies a transition
radius R with the weld termination ground smooth and
for transverse loading, the weld soundness established
by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance
with Section8.
Longitudinal Loading
R > 24 in. T or Rev. B 14
24 in. L R > 6 in. T or Rev. C 14
6 in. 1 R > 2 in. T or Rev. D 14
2 in. Z R T or Rev. E 14
Detail base metalfor transverse loading: equal thickness
and reinforcement removed
R > 24 in. T or Rev. B 14
24 in. 2 R > 6 in. T or Rev. C 14
6 in. Z R > 2 in. T or Rev. D 14
2 in. L R T or Rev. E 14,15
Detail base metal for transverse loading: equal thickness
and reinforcement not removed
R > 24 in. T or Rev. C 14
24 in.2 R > 6 in. T or Rev. C 14
6 in. 2 R > 2 in. T or Rev. D 14
2 in. 2 R T or Rev. E 14.15
(continued)
Table 4 (Continued)
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Stress Illustrative
Kind of Category xample Numbers
General Condition Situation Stressa :see Table3) (See Figure I)b
Attachments Detail base metalfor transverse loading: unequal thick-
(cont’d) ness and reinforcement removed
R > 2 in. T or Rev. 14
2 in.2 R T or Rev. 14, 15
Detail base metalfor transverse loading: unequal thick-
ness and reinforcement not removed
All R T or Rev. 14, 15
Detail base metalfor transverse loading
R > 6 in. T or Rev. 19
6 in.2 R > 2 in. T or Rev. 19
2 in.2 R T or Rev. 19
Base metal at detail attached by complete joint
penetration groove welds subject to longitudinal loading
2 in.c a I12b or 4 in. T or Rev. D 15
a > 12b or 4 in. when bI 1 in. T or Rev. E 15
a > 12b or 4 in. when b> 1 in. T or Rev. E 15
or partial
Base metal at detail attached by fillet welds
joint penetration groove welds subject
to longitudinal
loading
a I 2 in. T or Rev. C 15,23,24,25,26
2 in.< a I 12b or 4 in. T or Rev. D 15,23, 24, 26
a > 12b or 4 in. when b5 1 in. T or Rev. E 15.23, 24.26
a > 12b or 4 in. when b> 1 in. T or Rev. E‘ 15.23, 24,26
Base metal attached by fillet weldsor partial joint
penetration groove welds subjectedto longitudinal
loading when the weld termination embodies a transition
radius with the weld termination ground smooth:
R > 2 in. T or Rev. D 19
R 5 2 in. T or Rev. E 19
Fillet-welded attachments where the weld termination
embodies a transition radius, weld termination ground
smooth. and main material subject to longitudinal
loading:
R > 2 in. T or Rev. D 19
R I 2 in. T or Rev. E 19
by fillet
Base metal at stud-type shear connector attached T or Rev. C 22
weld or automatic end weld
Shear stress on nominal area of stud-type shear
connectors S F
Notes:
a. “T” signifies range in tensile stress only: “Rev.” signifies a range involving reversal of tensile or compressive stress; “S” signifies range in shear,
including shear stress reversal.
b. These examples are provided as guidelines and are not intended to exclude other reasonably similar situations.
c. Allowable fatigue stress range for transverse partial joint penetration groove welds and transverse fillet welds is a function of the effective throat,
depth of penetration, and plate thickness. See Frank and Fisher. Journal offhe Structural Division, Vol. 105. No. ST9.Sept. 1979.
2
PLATE AS SHOWN
OR WIDER THAN E OR E
C 3
..)-.c
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
5
12
13
..c-)
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I .
V Y
23
17
b
20
14
Table 5
Minimum Effective Throat for Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds
Metal Thickness of Thicker Part Jointed
Minimum Effective Throat
in. mm in. mm
To 1/4 6 incl. 118 3
5 Over
3/16114 to 112
incl.incl. 13 6 to
1/2 Over
incl. to 31419incl. to 13 1/4 6
Over 3/4 to 1-112 incl. 5/1 19 to 38.1
incl. 6 8
to 1-112 38.1Over incl. to 2-1/4 57.1 incl. 318 10
to 2-114 Over 57.1 incl. incl. to 152 112 13
Over 16
Note: The effective throat does not need to exceed the thicknessof the thinner part joined.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ROOT OF WELD 1
EFFECTIVE THROAT f\
\\ ROOT OF WELD
EFFECTIVE THROAT
(A) WELD DEPOSITEDBY (B) WELD DEPOSITED BY A

SHALLOW SMAW DEEP PENETRATION PROCESS
OF ROOT WELD INFORCEMENT
EFFECTIVE THROAT
(C) ACTUAL THROAT OFA BEVEL GROOVE

WELD REINFORCED WITHA FILLET WELD
Figure 2"Fillet and Combined Weld Dimension
STD. AUS
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
15
Table 6
Minimum Fillet Weld Size
Weld Size"
Deep Penetration Processb
for Single Pass WeldsC
Metal
Thickness of Thicker
Part
Joined
Shielded
Metal
Arc
Welding
Flat or Horizontal
Positions
in. mm in. mm in. mm
To114 incl. 6 118 3 1/8 3
Over114 to 112 incl. 6 to 13 3116 5 118 3
Over 112 to 314 incl. 13 to 19 1 14 6 3/16 5
Over 314 and up 19 5116 8 114 6
Notes:
a. Weld size need not exceed thickness of thinner member. Minimum weld size for cvclicallv loaded structures is 3/16 in. (5 mm).
b. The intent of this table is not to establish the arc welding processes that provide deep penetration, but rather, to establish the typical allowable
decrease of fillet weld size, provided the manufacturer can demonstrate that the required effective throat can be obtained by the qualified welding
procedure in accordance with Section 7.
c. Also applies to the root pass of a multiple-pass weld.
EFFECTIVE THROAT, FLAT OR CONVEX

7EFFECTIVE THROAT, FLAT OR CONVEX
x ,- EFFECTIVE THROAT, CONCAVE
Kr EFFECTIVE THROAT, CONCAVE
c
(B) DEEP PENETRATION FILLET WELD
(A) STANDARD FILLET WELD
EFFECTIVE THROAT, FLAT OR CONVEX

EFFECTIVE THROAT, CONCAVE
GROOVE WELD SIZE
(C) COMBINATION GROOVE-FILLET WELD
Figure 3-Size and Effective Throat of Fillet and Combination Groove-Fillet

Welds
16
parts shall be interrupted at a corner common to both 6 in. (152 mm) MAX
li-
welds.
Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents,
fillet welds connecting attachments shall start or termi-
nate not less than the weld size from the end of the joint.
For girder stiffeners,the weld joining the stiffeners tothe
web shall start or terminate not less than four times the
thickness of the web from the face of the flange.
4.4.5 Fillet welds in holes or slots may be used to

transmit shear in lap joints, to prevent the buckling or
separation of lapped parts, or to join components of
built-up members. Filletwelds in holes or slots arenot to
be considered plug or slot welds.
4.4.6 Fillet welds shall not be used in skewed T-joints

that have an included angle of less than 60 degrees or
more than 135 degrees.The edgeof the abutting member Figure 4-Staggered Intermittent
shall be beveled, when necessary, to limit the root open- Fillet Weld
ing to 1/8 in. (3 mm) maximum.
4.5 Intermittent Fillet Welds
4.5.1 The length of any segment of intermittent fillet 4.7 Plug and Slot Welds
welds shall not be less than four times the weld size, with
a minimum of 2 in. (51 mm). Welds shall be made on 4.7.1 Plug or slot welds may be used to transmit shear
both sides of the joint for at least25 percent of its length. loading in a lap joint,to prevent buckling or separation
Maximum spacing permitted between welds shall be of lapped parts, or to join component parts of built-up
12 in. (300 mm). members, exceptwith quenched andtempered steels.
4.5.2 Intermittent fillet welds may be used to carry 4.7.2 The effective area shall be the nominal area of
calculated loads. the hole or slot in the planeof the faying surface.
4.5.3 Intermittent fillet welds shall be no lessthan 2 in. 4.7.3 The minimum diameter of the hole for a plug
(5 1mm) in length at each endof the joint. (Noterestric- weld shall be no less than the thickness of the part con-
tion in 4.4.4.) taining it plus 5/16 in.(8 mm), preferablyrounded to the
next greater odd 1/16 in.(1.6 mm). The maximumdiam-
4.5.4 Intermittent fillet welds on primary tension eter shall equal the minimum diameter plus 1/8 in.
members areprohibited. (3 mm) or 2-1/4 times the thickness of the member.
whichever is greater. The minimum center-to-center
4.6 Staggered Intermittent Fillet Welds(See Figure 4) spacing of plug welds shall be four times the diameterof
4.6.1 When staggered intermittent fillet welds are the hole.
used, the clear spacing shall be considered the distance 4.7.4 The length of the slot for a slot weld shall not
between two consecutive welds on the same sideof the exceed 10 times the thickness of the weld. The width of
plate. the slot shall not be less than the thickness of the part
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
containing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm), preferably rounded to

4.62 When the total aggregate length of the staggered
the next greater odd 1/16 in. (1.6 mm). The maximum
intermittent fillet welds is 90 percent or more of the joint
width shall equal the minimum width plus 1/8 in. (3 mm)
length, any odd number of weld segments may be used
or 2- 1/4 times the thickness of the member, whichever is
provided:
greater. The endsof the slot shall be semicircular or shall
( I ) Welds are placed at each end of the joint on one have the corners rounded to a radius not less than the
side thickness of the part containing it, except those ends
(2) Clear spacing doesnot exceed 6 in. (152 mm) which extend to the edge of the part.
4.6.3 Intermittent staggered fillet welds on primary 4.7.5 The depth of filling of plug or slot welds in
tension members are prohibited. metal 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick or less shall be equal to the
17
thickness of the metal. In metal over Y 8 in. (16 mm) 4.9.3 Joint Class III.Joints in this class are complete
thick, it shall be at least one-half the thicknessof the joint penetration butt, T-, and comer joints welded from
metal but no less than 5/8 in. (16 mm). both sides, or from one side using a backing strip that is
not removed after welding.
4.7.6 The minimum center-to-center spacing of plug
welds shall be four times the diameter
of the hole. 4.9.4 Joint Class IV. Joints in this class are complete
joint penetration butt, T-, and comer joints welded from
4.7.7 The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a one side without the use of backing; partial joint penetra-
direction transverse to their length shall be four times the tion butt, T-, and comer jointswelded on both sides; and
width of the slot. The minimum center-to-center spacing fillet-welded lap, T-, and corner joints welded on both
in a longitudinal direction on any lineshall be two times sides.
the length of the slot.
4.9.5 Joint Class V. Joints in this class are partial
4.7.8 Plug andslot welds on primary tension members joint penetration butt, T-, and corner joints welded on
are prohibited. one side; and fillet-, plug-, or slot-welded lap, T-, and
4.8 Suggested Classification of Welded Joints corner jointswelded on oneside only.
4.8.1 The classifications of welded joints for use in 4.9.6 Joint Class VI. Joints in this class are joints
the design and manufacture of overhead material han- which do not require special weld groove preparation,
dling machinery and equipment are listed in 4.9 and such as butt, T-. corner, lap, or edge joints;plug welds;
illustrated in Figure 5. welds of secondary importance in strength; and structural
welded joints of secondary importance not subject to
4.8.2 These classifications can be used for qualifica- dynamic loading.
tion and examinationof welded joints used in fabrication
of equipment coveredby this specification. 4.10 Joint Qualification
4.10.1 Joints meeting the following requirements are
4.8.3 It is not the intent of these classifications to re-
designated as prequalified:
strict the use of other proven methods and procedures
that have achieved acceptable results, when agreed to in (1) Conformance with the details of 4.2 through 4.7,
writing by the manufacturer andpurchaser. and Figure 6 or 7
(2) Welded with one of the following processes in ac-
4.9 Weld Joint Classes cordance with the requirements of Section 6 , Processes
and Filler Metals, as applicable: shielded metal arc, sub-
4.9.1 JointClass I. Jointsinthisclassaredouble- merged arc, flux cored arc, and gas arc with other
weldedbuttjoints with completejoint penetration. The than short-circuitingtransfer
root of the first weld is chipped, gouged, or ground to
soundmetalbeforemakingthesecondweld,andthe 4.10.2 Otherjointconfigurationsmay be used with
weld facesareground or machinedflush with thedirec- proper qualification in accordance with Section 7,
tion of metalremovalparalleltotheprinciplestress. Qualification.
Welded joints that are made using backing tape, fusible
4.11 Transition of Thicknesses or Widths at Butt
flux backing material, or a nonfusible backing bar, and
Joints
are back welded to obtain a completely fused root, shall
be qualified in accordance with Section 7. Qualification. 4.11.1 Butt joints between parts of unequal thick-
Finished joints shall be nondestructively examined ac- nesses and also subject to tensile stress shall have a
cording to Section 8, Weld Quality and Inspection, and smooth transition between the offset surfaces at a maxi-
the results recorded. mum slope of 1 in 2-1/2 with the adjacent surface of ei-
ther part. The transition may be accomplished by sloping
4.9.2 Joint Class II. Joints in this class are double-
the weld face(s), by chamfering the thicker part, or by a
welded butt, T-, and corner joints with complete joint
combination of the two methods (seeFigure 8).
penetration. The root of the first weld is chipped,
gouged, or ground to sound metal before making the sec- 4.11.2 Transition of thickness in butt joints between
ond weld. Welded joints that are made using backing parts of unequal thickness, that are subject only to shear
tape, fusible flux backing material, or a nonfusible back- or compressive stress, shall be accomplished as specified
ing bar, and are back welded to obtain a completely fused in 4.11.1 when the offset between surfaces at either side
root, shall be qualified in accordance with Section 7, of the joint is greater than the thickness of the thinner
Qualification. Finished joints shall be nondestructively part connected. When the offset does not exceed the
examined according to Section 8, Weld Quality and In- thickness of the thinner part connected, the face of the
spection, and the results recorded. weld shall be sloped ( 1 ) no more than 1 in 2-1/2 from the
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
18
JOINT CLASS CONflGURATlON OF WELDED JOINTS
I
+r+ .........
.:.:o.
II
83:'
F .:.:.:x..
m.
55,
c)(=+
.:i::::::.
:A:::'
.::::::
......
.::::S..
111 ............
P
.:.:.:.:.:.y
:.:.:.:.:.:..
:%::.'
.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.
W .:.:.:.:.:.:.:.
F.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.'
.........
:.:.:.i:.:.
.:::.:
LfJ
\;
.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:..I
.............
..........
:i:>f:
IV
A ..........
..::: :::.
_da_
U
. . . . . . ..:.:.:.:..
i.:.:.:.
..::r::
::: ::... . .
x::,
Figure 5-Classification of Welded Joints
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
S T D - A W S DLq.1-ENGL L997 = 07842b5 0509555 525 =
19
JOINT CLASS CONFIGURATION OF WELDED JOINTS
1
A F .....
..:..
.....
,.:.:.+:
r
......
.......
2:::;
:,:
i
V
, /r+
.......
..........
........
.....
.:.:.:.:..
.:.;.:
-t D .:.+..,..
........
.:.:(......
e & .::*..:.:.:.:.:.:..
..............
::::::::.::::
.:.+:.:.:.:.>
.::::::::t:..
..................
::.........
.:.:.:.::;::.:.:.
........
:.::::::::+
::i:::::.,
cï3 .......
.r.:.:.:.:..
......
VI
e .:.:.:.
hTJy+ .A. IL.

.:.:.:.:.:.;
......
...........
.....
.........
...........
?3!.?!i
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
.............
...........
....
...:.:.,.,.
:.:.)‘.:.,.,
.:.:.: ::..::
:
...........
..........
.........
&
...........
NOTE: AVOID LOADING THE JOINTIN THE ARROW DIRECTION.
Figure 5 (Continued)-Classification of Welded Joints
Square-groove weld (1)
Butt joint (B)
Comer joint (C)
I II
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Groove Preparation
Base MetalThickness
(U = unlimited) Tolerances
. Permitted Gas
As Detailed As Fit-Up Shielding Welding
Tl T2 Root Opening (see 4.13) (see 5.4.4) Positions FCAW Notes for
B-L1a 114 max - R = T, -O +1/4, -1116 +1116, All - -
C-L1a 114 max U R = T, +1/16. -O +1/4. -1116 All - -
I B-Lla-GF W8max - R =T1 +1116, -O +114, -1116
All I Not
required 1 A
Square-groove weld(1)
Butt joint(B)
-S
BACKGOUGE EXCEPT B-L1
Shielding
- I c
required A, C
Note A: Not prequalified for gasmetal arc welding usingshort circuiting transfer.
Note C: Gouge root beforewelding second side.
Note D: Welds must be centered on joint.
Figure 6"Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints
21
;quare-groove weld (1)

-joint (T)
:orner joint (C)
BACKGOUGE
1-7
I.'
-8
Groove Preparation
Base Metal Thickness
Permitted Gas
Welding Joint As Detailed As Fit-Up Shielding Welding
Process Designation Tl TZ Root Opening (see 5.4.4) (see 4.13) Notes for FCAW Positions
SMAW I TC-Llb
t
GMAW Not
TC-L1-GF 318 max U R = O to 118 +1116, -0 +1/16, -118 Al1 A, C, J
FCAW required
SAW TC-L1-S 318 max U . R=O io +1/16. -0 Flat - C,J
jingle-V-groove weld(2) Tolerances

3u6 joint (B)
(see
4.13)
(see
5.4.4)
L
R = +1/16, -0 I +1/4, -1116
a = +lo", -O" I +lo",-5"

(U = unlimited) Groove Preparation Permitted
Welding Joint Welding Shielding
Process Designation T, I Tz Root Opening Positions' Groove Angle
1
SMAW
-"---
B-U2a U
R = 114
R = 318
R = 112
a = 45"
a = 30"
a = 20" I
All
I V.F..
V,F, OH
. OH
- 1 - 1
I 1
GMAW
FCAW
I B-U2a-GF
~
R = 3116
R = 318
R = 114
a=3W
c1 = 30"
a = 45"
V, F, OH
I F, V, OH
I F.. V..~OH
B-L2a-S 2 max - R = 114 CL = 30" F
BU2-S U - R = 518 a = 20" F
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metalarc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note C: Gouge root before welding other side.
Note J: If fillet weldsare used to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal
114 T,,
to but need not exceed318 in.
(9.5 mm). The reinforcement of groove welds in corner joints, when required, shall
be made with fillet welds equalto 114 T,, but
need not exceedW8 in. (9.5 mm).
"F = Flat, OH = Overhead, V = Vertical
Figure 6 (Continued)"Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove

Welded Joints
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
22
jingle-V-groove weld (2)

:orner joint (C)
As Detailed As Fit-Up
(see 4.13) (see 5.4.4)
I
Welding Joint
Process Designation
-"---
SAW I C-L2a-S
SAW I C-UP-S
Single-V-grooveweld (2)
..
3 u i joint (B)
I BACKGOUGE
- -
Groove Preparation
Base MetalThickness
Root Opening Permitted Gas
Welding Joint Roo1 Face As Detailed AS Fit-Up Welding Shielding
Process Designation Tl T2 Groove Angle
R = O to 118
(see 4.1 3)
+1/16, -O
- +1/16, -118
(see 5.4.4) Positions for FCAN Notes
SMAW B-U2 U - f = O to 118 + l l l 6 , -O Not limited All C

a = 60" + lo", -0" +lo", -5"
R = O to 118 +1/16, -O +1116, -118
- Not
1 1 1
B-U2-GF U f = O to 118 +1/16, -O Not limited All A, C
FCAW required
a = 60" + IO", - O o +1O", -5"
R=O
Over 112 to 1 f = R114
=Omax
a- 60"
R=& +1116, -O
SAW B-L~c-S Over 1 to 1-112 f = 112 m m f = +o, -f i1116 F C
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I
l I
- I
a=60"
R. .= O
-
a = +lo", -O" +lo", -5"
1 Over 1-112 to 2 f = 518 max

a = 60"
Note A: Not prequalified for gasmetal arc welding using shortcircuiting transfer.
L
'F = Flat, OH = Overhead, V = Vertical
Figure 6 (Continued) -€'requalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove WeldedJoints
iingle-V-groove weld (2)
;orne! joint (C)
BACKGOUGE
T Base Metal Thickness
r
(U = unlimited)
Root Face Shielding
-
Groove Anale (see 4.13) (see 5.4.4) Positioñs for FCAW Notes
R = O to 118 +1/16, -0 +1116,
-118
U U f = o to 1/8 +1/16, -0 limited
All
Not C, J
a = 60" + lo", - o o +lo", -5"
1 U
C-U2-GF U
R=OtolW
f=Otol/8
a = 60"
+1/16, -0
+1/16, -0
+ lo", - o o
+1/16, -118
limited
All
Not
+lo", -5"
Not
required A. C, J
SAW I C-U2b-S U U
R=O
f'= 114max
a = 60"
*O
+O,-114
+1O", -0"
+1/16, -0
i1116
+lo",5 "
Flat C, J, K
louble-V-groove weld(3) Tolerances

3utt joint (B)
EE NOTE, BACKGOUGE As Detailed As Fit-Up
(see 4.13) (see 5.4.4)
R = i0 +1/4, -0
f=& +1116,-0
a=+1O0,4P +lo", -5"
Spacer = *o +1/16, -0
1
I I
~~~
(U = unlimited)
Preparation
Groove
Permitted
I
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Joint
Weldina I I I I I Groove Welding Shielding
Process , ~esignation T, T2 Root Opening Root Face Angle Positions* for Gas
FCAW Notes
U, preferably R = 114 f = O to 118 a = 45" All
518 or thicker - R = 318 f = O to 118 a = 30" F,V, OH
B-U3a Spacer =
118 x R R = 112 f = O to 118 a = 20" F,V, OH
SAW I B-U3a-S
U
114 x R
f = O to 114 c( = 20" F
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
to 114 T,, but need not exceed318 in.
Note J: If fillet welds are usedto reinforce groove weldsin corner and T-joints, they shall be equal
(9.5mm). The reinforcement of groove welds in corner joints, when required, shall be made with fillet weldstoequal
114 T,, but
need not exceed318 in. (9.5mm).
Note K: Weld root after welding at least one pass on arrow side.
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than one-
fourth of the thicknessof the thinner part joined.
'F = Flat, OH = Overhead, V= Vertical
Figure 6 (Continued) "Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints
24
~~
Double-V-groove weld (3)

Butt joint(B)
l B-U3c-S
only
For I
-P- 1 For T, > 6-114,

orT, 5 2
S,= U 3 (T, 114) - I
Groove Preparation
Welding Joint As Detailed RootAsFace
Fit-Up Welding Shielding
Process Designation Tl T, Groove Angle (see 4.13) (see 5.4.4) Positions FCAW Notes for
SMAW B-U3b U R = O to 118 -0 +1116, -118 All+1/16, C, M -
preferably W8 - f = O to 1/8 +1116,-0 Not limited Not
or thicker a = ß = 60" +lo",-0" +lo", -5" All A, C, M
required
R=O +1/16,-0 +1116,-0
SAW B-U~C-S U - f = 114 min
a = ß = 60"
+1/4,-0
+lo",4'
+1/4,4
+loo,-5" Flat C, M -
To find S,see table above;S2= T, - (S,+ 1)
Note C: Gouge root before welding second side.
Note K: Weld root after welding at least one pass on arrow side.
Note P: Weld S2first with shielded metal arc low-hydrogen electrodes.Root of this weld shall be back gouged. WeldSIwith single or
multiple pass submerged arc weld in flat position after manual arc welding is completed
on other side.
Note X: It is permissible for the groove opening to vary from 0-118 in., in which case, weld as follows: Weld the S, groove first with
shielded metal arc using low hydrogen electrodes; complete the weld with submerged arc welding. The of theroot
SMAW weld
shall be back gouged. Weld the S, groove with shielded metal arc usinglow hydrogen electrodeor by submerged arc welding.
Figure 6 (Continued)"Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
25
Single-bevel-groove weld (4) Tolerances

Butt joint(B)
As Detailed AS Fit-Up
(see 4.13) (see 5.4.4)
R = +1116, -0 +1/4, -1116
a = +lo", -0' +lo", -5"

(U = unlimited) Groove Preparation Gas Permitted
Welding Joint Shielding Welding
Process Designation Tl T2 Groove Angle Root Positions
Opening for FCAW Notes
SMAW B-U4a U - R = 114 a = 45" All - Br

R = 318 a = 30" All - Br
R = 3/16 a = 30" All Required A
B-lJ4a-GF U - R = II4 a = 45" All A Not req.
R = 318 a = 30" Not req. A
Flat
Single-bevel-grooveweld (4) I Tolerances 1I

T-joint (T)
Corner joint (C) n 1 As Detailed
[see 4.13)
AS Fit-Up
NOTE V
roove Preparation
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
to the horizontal welding position.
Note Br: Dynamic load application limits these joints
Note J: If fillet welds are used to reinforce groove welds
in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal
1/4 T,, but
(9.5 mm). The reinforcementof groove welds in corner joints, when required, shall be made with fillet weldstoequal
need not exceed318 in. (9.5 mm).
Note V For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configurationis
not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
'F = Flat, OH = Overhead, V = Vertical

Welded Joints
S T D - A W S D L q - L - E N G L 1777 07842b5 0 5 0 7 5 b 2 7bS
26
Singíe-bevel-grme weld (4)

Butt joint (B)
Groove Preparation
Base MetalThickness
Welding Root Face Joint
As Detailed As Fit-Up Welding Shielding
Process Designation Tl T2 Groove Angle (see 5.4.4) (seePositions
4.13) for FCAW Notes
SMAW B-U4b U - R = O to 118 +1/16, -0 +1/16, -118 All - C
:!,f B-U4b-GF U - f = O to 118

a = 45"
+1/16, -0
+loo, -0"
Not limited
1O", -5" Al1
Not
A, C
required
Single-bevel-groove weld (4)

T-joint (T)
NOTE J
"R
Groove Preparation
Root Opening Gas Permitted
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit-Up Welding Shielding
Process Designation Tl T2 Groove Angle (see 5.4.4) (seePositions
4.13) for FCAW Notes
-
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
U U R = O to 118 +1/16, -0 +1/16, -118 All C,J, V

f = O to 118 +1/16, -0 Not limited Not A, C, J,
TC-U4b-GF U U a=450 +lo", - o o 1O", -5" All
required V
R=O *O +1/4, -0
- C, J, V,
TC-U4b-S U U f = 1/4max +O, -118 i l l 16 Flat
+lo", -0"
Y
CL = 60" 1O", -5.
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using shortcircuiting transfer.
Note J: If fillet weldsare used to reinforce groove weldsin corner and T-joints, theyshall be equalto 1/4 T,, but need not exceed38 in.
(9.5 mm). The reinforcementof groove welds in comer joints, when required,shall be made with fillet welds equal to 114 T,, but
need not exceed3/8 in. (9.5 mm).
Note V: For comer joints, the outside groove preparation may bein either or both members, provided the basic groove configurationis
Note Y: Shielded metal arc or submerged arc backing fillet weld required.
jingle-bevel-groove Tolerances
veld (4)
r-joint (T) AS Fit-Up As Detailed
:orner joint (C) (see 4.13) (see 5.4.4)
R = +f/16, -O +1J4, -1J16
a =+lo". -Oo +lo", -5"

(U = unlimited) Groove Preparation Permitted Gas
Welding Joint . Welding Shielding
Process Designation Tl I Tz Root Opening Groove Angle for FCAW Notes
Positions'
R = 114 a = 45" All -
SMAW TC-lJ4d U U -
'
J, V
R = 318 a = 30" F, V, OH
R = 3/16 a = 30" All
,-.lall,
UlVlMVV
FcAw 1 TC-lJ4d-GF 1 R = 318
R = 114 l
a = 30"
aAll
= 45"
I
Required
I
Flat req. Not
I NO^ rea. A, J, V 1
SAW TC-U4d-S U U
R = 318 I a = 30"
Flat - J, V
R = il4 n = 450
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Single-bevel-groove weld (4)
r-joint (T)
>orner joint (C)
BACKGOUGE
A k a
1-7 NOTE V
I /
V
f
30"
I Base Metal Thickness

(U = unlimited)
I Groove Preparation
Tolerances
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle 4.13) Positions
(see 5.4.4) (see for FCAW Notes
SMAW TC-U4c U U R = o to 118 + l m , -o + l m , -118 All - C,J, V .
GMAW f = O to 118 +1/16, -0 Not limited Not A, C, J,
TC-U~C-GF U a=45" +lo", -0" +lo", -5" V
FCAW required
SAW TC-L~C-S U 1 1 U
R=O
f = 1/4max
CL = 60'
1 +O, -118
io
+lo". -0"
1 +1/4, -0
i1116
+1O". -5"
1
Flat
Note J: If fillet welds are usedto reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal
114toT,, but need not exceed318 in.
(9.5 mm).
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparationmay be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is
not changed and adequate edge distance is maintainedto support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
Note Y: Shielded metal arc or submerged arc backing weld required.
'F = Flat, OH = Overhead, V= Vertical
28
Iouble-bevel-grooveweld (5)
3utt joint (B)
LI I A I 'a
Groove Preparation
Base MetalThickness
Root Opening . Permitted Gas
Process Designation Tl T2 Groove Angle (see 4.13) (see 5.4.4) Positions
R = 0 to 118 +1116, -0 +1/16, -118
f = 0 to 118
+1/16, -0 Not limited
U,preferably -
B-U5a
518 or thicker a = 45"
ß=Ooto150
R = 0 to 118
+1 O"
a + ß -0"
+1/16, -0
+1 O"
a + ß -5"
+1/16, -118
All
- 1
GMAW f = 0 to 118
+1116, -0 Not limited Not
B"-GF U, preferably All A, C, M
FCAW 5/8 or thicker a = 45" +1o" +1 O" required
p=oOto150 a + ß -00 a + ß -00
Note C: Gouge root before welding otherside.
Note J: If fillet welds are usedto reinforce groove weldsin corner and T-joints, they shallbe equal to 114 T,, but need not exceed 3/8 in.
(9.5 mm). The reinforcement of groove weldsin corner joints, when required. shall be made with fillet welds equalto 1/4 T,, but
need not exceedW8 in. (9.5 mm).
Note M: Double-groove welds may have groovesof unequal depth. but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than one-
fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may bein either or both members, providedthe basic groove configuration is
not changedand adequate edge distanceis maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
Note 2: When lower plate is beveled, make the firstroot pass on this side.
'F = Flat, OH = Overhead
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
)ouble-bevel-groove weld(5)
'-joint h
I \
:orner joint (C) t-A
K-(
1-7
I /
V
NOTE V
BACKGOUGE
NOTE J
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I IMetalThickness
Base I Groove Preparation
Tolerances
I I
(U = unlimited) Root Opening Permitted Gas
Process Designation Tl T, Groove Angle (see 4.13) (see 5.4.4) Notes for FCAW Positio
U,
SMAW TC-U5b preferably 518 U All - C,J, M,
R = o to B
l +1116, -O + l m , -118 V
or thicker f = O to 118 +1/16, -O Not limited -
U, ci = 45" + lo", -0" +lo", -5" Not A, C, J,
TC-US-GF preferably 518 U All
or thicker required M,V
R=O *O +1116, -O
SAW TC-US-S U U f = 3116 max +O,-311 6 *li16 Flat - C, J, M,
V
a = 60" +lo", -0" +lo", -5"
Iouble-bevel-groove weld (5) Tolerances

"joint (T) I'\
>orner joint(C) As Detailed As Fit-Up
t-L / (see 5.4.4) (see 4.13)
SEE NOTE,
BACKGOUGE
I Spacer 1 +1/16, -0 I +1/8, -0
NOTE J
NOTE: SAME STEEL AS

I"
Welding
Process
Joint
Designation
' Base Metal Thickness
(U = unlimited)
T, T, Root Opening
Groove Preparation
Root Face
Groove
Angle
BASE METAL
Permitted
Positions'
Gas
Shielding Welding
for FCAW Notes
U, preferably
R = 114 f = o to 1/8 U = 45" All - C, J,
5/8 or thicker M, v
SMAW TC-U~C Spacer =
~~~
R = 316 f = O to 118 u=30" F, OH - C, J,

1/8 x R M, V
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer
Note J: If fillet welds are used to reinforce groove weldsin corner and T-joints, they shall be equalto 1/4 T,, but need not exceed3/8 in.
(9.5 mm). The reinforcement of groove welds in corner joints, when required, shall be made with fillet welds equal114 toT,, but
need not exceed 318 in. (9.5 mm).
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is
not changed and adequate edge distanceis maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
Figure 6 (Continued) "Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded

Joints
30
louble-bevel-grooveweld (5)
r-joint (T)
;orner joint (C)
W BACKGOUGE
NOTE J
rlOTE: SAME STEEL AS BASE METAL

I+"-
Groove Preparation
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit-Up Shielding Welding
Process Designation T, T2 Groove Angle (see 4.13) (see 5.4.4) Positions for FCAW Notes
U, R = O to 118 -0 +1116, -118 +1/16,
TC-U5d U f = O to 1/8 +1/16,-0 -
All Not limited C, J, M,
SMAW preferably 5/8 V
or thicker a = 45" +loo, -oo +loo,-5"
Note J: If fillet welds are used to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, theybeshall
equal to 1/4T,, but need not exceed318 in.
(9.5 mm).
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
31
Single-U- roove weld (6)) Tolerances

Butt jointYB)
&T
joint Corner II II / As Detailed As Fit-Up
:K- (see
4.13)
(see 5.4.4)
IEF
R = +1116, -O +1116, -118
CL =+lo", -o" +lo", -5"
f = 21/16 Not limited
...:.,.
q_...
. ...:.:.:.:
..i..
.: .
:.:
,:::y:%:::.. ....
.v*y.
: ,::,.:.. r = +va, -o +118,4
Welding Shielding
Process
XEiT-p
Not req. A, C, J
Double-U-groove weld (7) Tolerances

Butt joint (B)
ACKGOUGE (see 4.13) (see 5.4.4)
For B-U7 and B-U7-GF
R = +1/16, -0 +1/16. -118
a = +lo", -O" +lo -5"",
f = i1116, 4 Not Limited
r = +114, -0 i1116
For B-U7-S

(U = unlimited)
Preparation
Groove
Permitted
Welding Joint Root Groove Root Welding
Groove Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 . -Positions'
ODenino Radius
Face -
Anale
I SMAW su7 U - R=Oto1/8 a=45" f=1/8 r=1/4 All

--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
B"GF
t
R=Oto1/8 a=20" f=1/8 r=1/4 F,OH
, required
Not 1 A,
C, M I
I I
I
SAW B-U7-S
Note J: If fillet welds are usedto reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints. they shall be equal
(9.5 mm). The reinforcementof groove welds in corner joints, when required, shall
'F = Flat. OH = Overhead
32
ingle-J-groove weld(8) Tolerances

utt joint (B)
As Detailed As Fit-Up
(see 4.13) (see 5.4.4)
I R =+1/16. -O I +1/16. -118
f
1
Base MetalThickness
(U = unlimited) Groove Preparation
Permitted Gas
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Welding Groove Root GrooveShielding

Welding Root Joint
'rocess Designation Tl T, Opening Angle Face Radius Positions for FCAW Notes
SMAW B-U8 U - R=Otol/8 a=45" f=118 r=3/8 All - C
GMAW
FCAW
B-UB-GF U - R=Otol/8 a=30" r=W8 f=1/0 Not req. A, C
All
Singe-J-groove weld(8) Tolerances

:-joint (T) h
I \
>orner joint (C)
(see 4.13) (see 5.4.4)
c-7 NOTE V
NOTE J
"I
Base MetalThickness
Permitted Gas
Welding Groove Root GrooveShielding
Welding Root Joint
Process Designation Tl T2 Face
Angle Opening for FCAW Notes
Positions' Radius
SMAW TC-U8a U " R = O t o 118

R=Oto1/8
ct=45"
a=30" f=118
118 r = 3 / 8 f = All
r=3/8 F,OH
-
-
C, J, V
C, J, V
GMAW Not A,C, J,
TC-U8a-GF U U R = O t o 118 C I =30" f = 118 r =3/8 All
FCAW required V
Note A: Not prequalifiedfor gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note J: If fillet weldsare used to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they be
shall
equal to 114 T,, but need not exceed318 in.
(9.5 mm). The reinforcement of groove welds in corner joints, when required, shall
Note V For corner joints, the outside groove preparation maybe in either or both members, provided the basic groove configurationis

Welded Joints
33
Single-J-groove weld (8)

r-joint (T)
;orner joint (C)
P\ As Detailed AS Fit-Up
b-i
(see 4.13) (see 5.4.4)
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TzGkR
NOTE V
F¿'
45" TO 90"

Permitted Gas
Welding Joint Groove Root GrooveShielding
Root Welding
Process Designation Tl T2 Opening Angle Face for FCAW Notes
Positions" Radius
R = O t o 118 a=45" f = 118 r=3/8 All -
SMAW TC-U8b U -
R=Oto1/8 a=30" f=1/8 r=3/8 F,OH
GMAW a=30° f = 118 r=3/8 Not req. All
TC-Ub8-GF U U R = O t o 118
FCAW
Iouble-J-groove weld (9) Tolerances

h t t joint (B)
(see 5.4.4) (see 4.13)
R = +1/16, -O +1/16, -118
a = +lo-o" ", +lo", -5"
f = +1/16, 4 Not Limited
r = +1/4, -O k1116
Welding
Process
SMAW
GMAW
FCAW
Note J: If fillet welds are used to reinforce groove welds
need not exceed 318 in. (9.5 mm).

r
L
Joint
Designation
B-U9
t B-US-GF
(U = unlimited)
T,
Preparation
Groove
U, preferably
518 or thicker
U, preferably
518 or thicker
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer
1 iT,
-
-
Groove Root
Opening
R=Oto1/8
R=Oto1/8
I Groove
Angle i
~ ~ 4 5 f=1/8
u=30°
"
f=1/8
in corner and T-joints, they shall be equalto 1/4 T,, but need not exceed 318 In.
(9.5 mm). The reinforcement of groove welds in corner joints, when required, shall be made with fillet welds equal114
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth,

to T,, but
but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than one-
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in elther or both members, provided the bastc groove configuration is
I Radius
r=W8
r=3/8
I Permitted
Welding
Positions'
All
All
Gas
Shielding
for FCAW
Not
required
Notes
c. M
A. C, M
34
Iouble-J-grooveweld (9)
r-joint (T)
I Tolerances
:orner joint (C)
I f = +1116, -O I Not Limited

r I r=+1/8.-0 I i1116
Base MetalThickness
(U = unlimited)
Preparation
Groove
~ Permitted Gas
Welding Joint Welding
Groove
Root
Groove
Root Shielding
Process Designation Tl T2Radius
Face
Opening
Angle Positions* for
FCAW Notes
R=Ot01/8 a=45" f=1/8 r=3/8 All

SMAW TC-U9a U, preferably
5/8 or thicker
R=OtO 1/8 a=30" f = 1/8 r=3/8 F,OH
GMAW
FCAW
TC-U9a-GF Not req. I "
& I
!
,
ble-J-grooveweld (9) Tolerances

nt (T) I'\
ler joint (C) As Detailed As Fit-Up
t-A
I I (see 5.4.4) (see 4.13)
R = +1116, -O +1116, -118
BACKGOUGE
a = +lo", - O o +lo", -5"
f = +1/16, -O Not Limited
r = +1/4, -0 i1116
Base MetalThickness
Permitted
-7-
lding Joint Root Groove Root GrooveShielding
Welding
cess Designation I
Ti T2 . - -
Anale Openina Radius Face
Positions*
U, preferably R = O to 118 a = 45" f = 118 r = 3/8 All
IAWTC-Ugb
5/8 or thicker R=Oto1/8 f=118 a=30"
r=3/8 F,OH
IAW preferably U R = O to 118 a = 30" f = 118 r t 3/8 All T-p
;AW 5/8 or thicker required M, V
Note A: Not prequalified for gasmetal arc welding usingshort circuiting transfer.
Note C: Gouge rootbefore welding other side.
Note J: If fillet weldsare used to reinforce groove welds in cornerand T-joints, theyshall be equal to 1/4 T,, but need not exceedW8 in.
(9.5 mm). The reinforcement of groove weldsin comer joints, when required,shall be made with fillet weldsequal to 114 T,, but
Note V: For comer joints,the outside groove preparation may bein either or both members, provided the basic groove configurationis

--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
S T D - A W S DL4.1-ENGL 1777 07842b5 0509573 778 m
35
;quare-groove weld (1)

3utt joint (B)
REINFORCEMENT 1/32TO 1/8,

NO TOLERANCE
Groove Preparation
.
Permitted Effective
Welding
Process II Designation
Joint
B-Pla
T,
118
T2
-
Root Opening
R = O to 1/16
As Detailed
(see 4.13)
+1/16, -0
As Fit-Up
(see 5.4.4)
i1116
Welding
Positions
All
Throat
(E)
T, - 1/32
Notes
B
I B-Plc 114 max - R=

Tl
v min +1/16, -0 i1116 All T,
-
2
B, E
Square-groove weld (1)

Butt joint (B)
REINFORCEMENT 1/32TO 118,

NO TOLERANCE
TO REINFORCEMENT
1/32 3T1 118,
E, + E, MUST NOT EXCEED 7
NO TOLERANCE
Welding
Process
SMAW
Joint
Designation
B-Plb
Note B: Joints welded from one side.

Note C2: Root need not
(U = unlimited)
Tl
114 max
T2
-
Root Opening
be gouged before welding other side.

Note E: Minimum effective throat as stated in Table 5.
R=
T
1
2
Groove Preparation
As Detailed
(see 4.13)
+1116, -0
Figure 'I-Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

Tolerances
As Fit-Up
(see 5.4.4)
ill16
Permitted
Welding
Positions
All
I Effective
Throat
(E)
?4?! I
Notes
C2,
E
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
36
Single-V-groove weld(2)
Butt joint (B)
Corner joint (C)
Groove Preparation
Root Opening Effective Permitted
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit-Up Welding Throat
Process Designation Tl T, Groove Angle (see 4.13) (see 5.4.4) Positions (E) Notes
R=O +ll16, -0 +1/8, -1116
SMAW BC-P2 114 min U f = 1/32 min +U, -0 *V16 All S E
a = 60" +lo", -0" +lo", -5"
R=O +1116,4 +118, -1116
:F/ BC-P2-GF 114 min U f = 118 min
a = 60"
+U, -o
+lo", -0"
tlll6
+lo", -5"
All S A, E
R=O *O +1/16, -0
SAW BC-P2-S 7116 min U f = 114 min +U, -0 til16 Flat S E
a = 60" +lo", -0" +lo", -5"
Note B: Joint is welded from one sideonly.
Note E: Minimum effective throat(E) as shown in Table 5; S as specified on drawings.
Figure 7 (Continued)"Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
37
>ouble-V-aroove weld (3) 1
Groove Preparation
Base MetalThickness
Root Opening - Permitted Effective
Welding
Process 1 Designation
Joint Tl T, Groove Angle
I
As Detailed RootAsFace
1
Fit-Up Welding
(see 5.4.4) (seePositions
4.13)
I
Throat
(E) Notes
SMAW I B-P3 112 min I 1I

-
R=O
f=1/8min
a = 60" I
+1/16, -0
+U. -0
+lo", -0 '
+11
;/!$16
I
+lo-5" ",
All
I
S
1 B-PS-GF 112 min - R=O

All *1/16 f = 1/8 min
a = 60"
I +1/16, -0 I +1/8, -1116 I
+U, -0
+loo,- o o +loo,-5"
S
SAW I
I
I
B-PS-S 314 min -
R=O
f = 114 min
a = 60"
*O
+U, -0
+lo", -0"
+1/16, -0
*1/16
+lo", -5"
Flat
S (see
Note D2) E, MP
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding uslhg short circuiting transfer.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Note D2: The parts to be joined by partial joint penetration groove welds parallel to the length of the member, bearing joints excepted,
shall be brought into as close contact as practicable. The gap between parts shall not exceed(4.8 3/16
mm)in. except in cases
involving rolled shapes or plates 3in. (76.2 mm) or greater in thicknessif, after straightening and in assembly, the gap cannot
be closed sufficiently tomeet this tolerance. in such cases, a maximum gap of 5/16 in. (8.0mm) is applicable provideda seal-
ing weld or suitable backing material is used to prevent melt-through and the final weld meets the requirements for effective
throat. Tolerances for bearing joints shallbe in accordance with the applicable contract specifications.
Note Mp: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided these conform to Note E. Also, the effective throat(E),less
any reduction, applies individually to each groove.
Figure 7 (Continued) "Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove

Welded Joints
S T D - A W S D L V - L - E N G L L797 m 078qZb5 0507574 487
38
Single-bevelgroove (4)
Butt joint (B)
T-joint (T)
Eomer joint (C)
Groove Preparation
Base MetalThickness -
Root Opening Permitted Effective
Welding Joint Root
Face Detailed
As As Fit-Up Welding Throat
Process Designation T, T2 Groove
Angle
(see 4.13) (see 5.4.4) Positions* (E) Notes
SMAW BTC-P4 U U
R=O
f = 118 min
a = 45"
+1/16,-O
+lo",
U
-Oo
+118,
-1116
i1116
+lo",-5"
All 1 S-118
GMAW
FCAW
BTC-P4-GF 114 min U
R=O
f = 118min
+1/16,-O
U'
+1/8, -1116
i1116
-:
a = 45" +lo",- o o +lo",-5"
R=O *O +1/16,-0
SAW TC-P4-S 7116 min U f = 114 min +U, -o i1116
a = 60" +loo,- O o +lo",-5"
Note A: Not prequalifiedfor gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note D2: Theparts to be joined by partial joint penetration groove welds parallel to the length of the member, bearing joints excepted,
shall be brought into as close contact as practicable. The gap between parts shall not exceed3/16in. (4.8 mm) exceptin cases
involving rolled shapes or plates 3 in. (76.2mm) or greater in thickness if, after straightening and in assembly, the gap cannot
be closed sufficiently to meet this tolerance. in such cases, a maximum gap of 5/16in. (8.0 mm) is applicable provided a seal-
throat. Tolerances for bearing joints shall be in accordance with the applicable contract specifications.
Note E: Minimum effective throat (E) as shown in Table 5;S as specified on drawings.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation maybe in either or both members, provided the basic groove configurationis
not changedand adequate edge distanceis maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
'For flat and horizontal positions, f = +U, -O
'F = Flat, H = Horizontal, OH = Overhead, V = Vertical
Figure 7 (Continued) "Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Iouble-bevel-groove weld (5)
3utt joint (B)
r-joint (T)
;orner joint (C)
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I Base Metal Thickness

(U = unlimited)
I Groove Preparation
Tolerances
Root Opening Permitted Effective
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit-Up Welding Throat
Process Designation Tl T, Groove Angle (see 4.13) (see 5.4.4) Positions' (E) Notes
R=O +1116, -0 +1/8, -1116
SMAW BTC-P5 5/16 min U f = 118 min U i1116 All (si sz) +
E, Mp
-1 I4
a = 45" + lo", -0" +lo", -5"
R=O -0 +1/8, -1116 +1116, F, H s1+ s,
F!:, BTC-PS-GF 112 min U f= 118 min
a = 45"
U'
+lo", - o o
i l l 16
+1O", -5" V, OH 1(' )2'+
-1 I4
A, E,
Mp
R=O *O +1116, -0
SAW TC-P5-S 314 min U f = 114min +U,-0 *1/16 Flat Si + S, E. Mp
a = 60" +lo", -0" +lo", -5"
Note A: Not prequalified forgas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note D2: The parts to be joined by partial joint penetration groove welds parallelto the length of the member, bearing joints excepted.
shall be brought into as close contact as practicable. The gap between parts shall not exceed (4.8 3/16mm)
in. except in cases
involving rolled shapes or plates 3 in. (76.2 mm) or greater in thickness if, after straightening andin assembly, the gap cannot
be closed sufficientlyto meet this tolerance. in such cases, a maximum gap of 5/16 in.(8.0 mm) is applicable provided a seal-
Note Mp: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided these conform to Note E. Also, the effective throat(E), less
any reduction, applies individuallyto each groove.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configurationis
*For flat and horizontal positions,=f+U, -0
'F = Flat, H = Horizontal, OH = Overhead, V = Vertical
Figure 7 (Continued)"Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove

Welded Joints
Single-U-groove weld(6)
Butt joint (B)
Comer joint (C)
a
1 1
IGroove Preparation
~ ~~
I
Face
(U = unlimited)
Tolerances
Opening
Root
Root Permitted
Welding Groove
Radius
Detailed
As As Fit-Up Welding
Process De$Fition T, Groove
Angle (see 4.13) (see 5.4.4) Positions
R=O +1/16, -0 +1/8, -1116
f = 1/32 min +U, -0 k1116 All
SMAW BC-P6 114 min r = 114 +1/4, -0 i1116
a=45" 1 + lo", -0' I +lo", -5" I
GMAW
R=O
f = 118 min
I +1116,-0 I +1/8,-1/16 I I
FCAW
BC-P6-GF I 114 min r = 114
a = 20"
+1/4, -0
IA,E
SAW BC-P6-S 1 7/16 min I U

f = 114 min
r = 114
a = 20"
+U, -0
+114, -0
+1/16, -0
+1 O", -5"
Flat
I E
I I
Note A: Not prequalified forgas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note 02: The parts to be joined by partial joint penetration groove welds parallel to the length of the member, bearing joints excepted,
shall be brought into as close contact as practicable. The gap between parts shall not exceedW1 6 in. (4.8 mm) exceptin cases
involving rolled shapes or plates 3 in. (76.2 mm) or greater in thickness if, after straightening and in assembly, the gap cannot
be closed sufficiently to meet this tolerance. in such cases,a maximum gap of 5/16 in. (8.0 mm) is applicable provided a seal-
throat. Tolerances for bearingjoints shall be in accordance with the applicable contract specifications.
Note E: Minimum effective throat (E) as shown in Table5; S as specified on drawings.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
)ouble-U-groove weld(7) 1
lutt joint (B)

Preparation
Groove I
I
(U = unlimited) Root Opening Tolerances
Root Face Permitted Effective
Welding Joint jroove Radius As Detailed As Fit-Up Welding Throat
I 1 I
Process Designation Groove Angle (see 4.13) (see 5.4.4) Positions (E) Notes
R=O +1116,-0 +ita, -1116
SMAW B-P7 112 min - f = 118 min +U,-o i1116 All
r = 114 +1/4,-O *1/16
a = 45" + 100, -00 +lo",-5"
GMAW
FcAw 1 B-P7-GF 1 112 min
l-
R=O
f = 1/13 min
r = 114
a = 20"
+1/16,-0
+U, -o
-0
+ lo",-Oo
+1/8, -1116
i1116
i1116 +1/4,
+loo,-5"
All
R=O io +1/16,-0
f.= 114 min +U, -o *1116
+s2 I
BP7-S 314 min Flat
r = 114 +1/4,-O 21/16
a = 20" +lo", -o" +loo,-5" s1 E, Mp
Note D2: The parts to be joined by partial joint penetration groove welds parallel to the length of the member, bearing joints excepted,
shall be brought into as close contact as practicable. The gap between parts shall not exceed 3/16in. (4.8 mm) exceptin cases
involving rolled shapesor plates 3 in. (76.2mm) or greater in thickness if, after straightening and in assembly, the gap cannot
be closed sufficiently to meet this tolerance. in such cases, a maximum gap of5/16in. (8.0mm) is applicable provided a seal-
Note Mp: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided these conform to E. Also,
Note the effective throat(E), less
any reduction, applies individually to each groove.
Figure 7 (Continued)"Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove

Welded Joints
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Single-J-groove weld (8)
Butt joint(B)
T-joint (T)
Comer joint (C)
I Base MetalThickness
(U = unlimited)
Welding
Process I Designation
Joint I Tl I T2
m T C - P B ' I 1/4 min I U
E,:! I BTC-P&GF* I 1/4 min I U
1 1 1
SAW I C-PB-S I 7/16 min I U
SAW T-P8-S 7116 min U
Note A: Not prequalifiedfor gas metal arc welding using shortcircuiting transfer.
Note D2:The parts to be joined by partial joint penetration groove welds parallel to the length of the member, bearing joints excepted,
shall be brought into as close contact as practicable. The gap between parts shall not exceed3/16 in. (4.8 mm) except in cases
involving rolled shapes or plates 3 in. (76.2 mm) or greater in thickness if, after straightening and in assembly, the gap cannot
be closed sufficiently to meet this tolerance.in such cases, a maximum gap of 5/16 in. (8.0mm) is applicable provided a seal-
Note E: Minimum effective throat (E) as shown in Table 5; S as specified on drawings.
Note V For corner joints, the outside groove preparation maybe in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is
not changedand adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
'Use a = 45" for T- and inside corner joints. Use a = 30" for butt and outside corner joints.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
STD-AUS DL'i-L-ENGL L777 078q2h5 0 5 0 7 5 7 7 Tb9
43
Iouble-J-groove weld (9)

3utt joint (B) h
I \
"joint (T)
>orner joint (C) t-L
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Preparation
Groove I
(U = unlimited)
Tolerances
Opening
Root
I
Root Face ~
Permitted Effective
Welding Joint Groove
Radius
Detailed
As Fit-Up
AsWelding Throat
Process Designation Groove
Angle
(see 4.13) (see 5.4.4) Positions (E)
R=O +1116,-0 i111 6
f = 118 min -0 i1116
SMAW BTC-P9 All SI + s 2
112 min r = 318 +114,-0 AlIl 6
a = 45" +loo,-o" +lo", -5"
R=O +1/16,-0 *1/16
GMAW f = 118 min -0 *1/16
lu
BTC-PS-GF 112 min All A, E, J,
FCAW r=3/8 +1/4,-0 ~1116 SI + s2 V
a = 30" +1 O", -o" +lo",-5"
c-PS-s 314 min a = 20" +lo", -oo +lo", -5" Flat SI + s, E, J. V
SAW f = 114 min

T-PS-S r = 112 +1/4,-0 e1116 SI + s2 E
Note 02: The parts to be joined by partial joint penetration groove welds parallel to the lengthof the member, bearing joints excepted,
shall be brought into as close contactas practicable. The gap between parts shall not exceed 3/16in. (4.8 mm) except in cases
involving rolled shapes or plates3 in. (76.2mm) or greater in thickness if, after straighteningand in assembly, the gap cannot
be closed sufficientlyto meet this tolerance. in such cases, a maximum gap of 5/16in. (8.0mm) is applicable provided a seal-
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structuresto reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall
be equal to 114
T,, but not exceed318 in. (9.5 mm). The reinforcement of groove welds in corner joints, when required, shall be made with fillet
welds equalto 1/4 T,, but not more than318 in. (9.5 mm).
'Fit-up tolerance. SAW: see Note D2; for rolled shapes R may be5/16in. (8.0mm) in thick plates if backing is provided.
Figure 7 (Continued) "Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints
44
TRANSITION BY SLOPING WELD SURFACE
REMOVE REMOVE
AFTER WELDING 1 WELDING AFTER
2.5
. , , REMOVE
AFTER WELDING
TRANSITION BY SLOPING WELD SURFACE

AND CHAMFERING
CHAMFER CHAMFER
BEFORE WELDING
CHAMFER
BEFORE WELDING
TRANSITION BY CHAMFERING THICKER PART
ALIGNMENT OFFSET ALIGNMENT

CENTERLINE
(PARTICULARLY
APPLICABLE TO WEB
PLATES)
(PARTICULARLY
APPLICABLE TO
FLANGE
PLATES)
NOTES:
1. GROOVE MAY BE OF ANY PERMITTEDOR QUALIFIED TYPE AND DETAIL.
2. TRANSITION SLOPES SHOWNARE THE MAXIMUM PERMITTED.
Figure 8-Transition of Butt Joints in Parts

of Unequal Thickness
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
45
surface of thethinnerpartor(2) to the surface of the 4.12.3 Spacersshallbe of thesamematerialasthe

thicker part if thisrequires a lesserslope. The exceptionbase metal.
is that truss memberjoints and beamand girder flange
4.13 Dimensional Tolerances. Dimensions of groove
joints shall be made with a smooth transition of the type
welds specified on design or detailed drawings may vary
specified in 4.11.1.
from the dimensions shown in Figures 6 and 7 only
4.11.3 Butt joints between parts of unequal width that within the following limits:
are subject to tensile stress shall have either (1)a smooth
4.13.1 The specified thickness of base metal or weld
slope between offset edges of no more than 1 in 2-1/2
effective throat is the maximum nominal thickness that
with the edge of either part or (2) a 2.0 ft (610 mm) min-
may be used.
imum radius tangent to the narrowerpart at the center of
the butt joint, as shownin Figure 9. A radius transition is 4.13.2 The groove angle is minimum; it may be de-
required for steels havinga yield strength greater than or tailed to exceed the dimensions shown by no more than
equal to 90 ksi (620 MPa). 10 degrees.
4.12 Prequalified Extension Bars, Runoff Plates, and 4.13.3 The radius of J- and U-grooves is minimum.
Backing Materials U-grooves may be prepared before or after fit-up.
4.12.1 Extension bars and runoff plates used in weld- 4.13.4 Double-groove weldsmay have grooves of un-
ing shall conform to the following requirements: equal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall
(1) When used for welding any approved steel listed be no less than 1/4 of the thickness of the thinner part
in 2.4, they may be of any of the steels in the same list. joined, unless otherwise designated in Figures 6 and 7.
(2) When used for welding with a steel qualified in
4.13.5 The root face of the joint shall be as shown in
accordance with this specification, they may be either the Figures and with the fol,owing variations
steel qualified or any steel listed in 2.4.
(1) For shielded metal arc, gas metal arc, and flux
4.12.2 Steel backing shall conform to the require- cored arc welding, it may not be detailed less than the
ments of 4.12.1, except that a backing of 100 ksi specifieddimension.
(689 MPa) minimum yield strength steel shall only be (2) For complete joint penetration submerged arc
used with a steel of the same minimum yield strength. welding, the specified root face of the joint is maximum.
B U T JOINT WIDTH OF
\ PLATE NARROWER
WIDTH OF r ' ,
WIDER r = 2 ft (0.6 rn)
PLATE
/I
7 1
r=2ft r=2ft
314 in.
PLAN VIEW
11/32 in.
3/32 in.
NOTE: MANDATORY FOR STEELS WITH A I I I I

YIELD STRENGTH GREATER THAN OR EQUAL 6ft 4ft 2ft
TO 90 ksi (620 MPa). OPTIONALFOR ALL OTHER STEELS. (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (0.6 rn)
DETAIL OF CUT JOINT
BUTT
Figure 9-Transition of Width at Butt Jointsof Parts Having Unequal Width (see
4.11.3)
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
46
4.13.6 The root opening of the joints is minimum. It 4.17.3 For members having symmetrical cross sec-
may be detailed to exceed the specified dimensionsby no tions, the connection welds shall be arranged symmetri-
more than 1/J 6 in. (1.6 mm), exceptthat the root opening cally about the axisof the member, or proper allowance
of joints for submerged arc welding shallbe detailed as shall be made for unsymmetrical distribution of stresses.
zero (no variation)when so specified.
4.17.4 For axially stressed angle members, the center
4.14 Lap Joints of gravity of the connecting welds shall lie betweenthe
line of the center of gravity of the angle's cross section
4.14.1The minimum overlap of parts in stress- and the centerline of the connected leg. If the center of
carrying lap joints shallbe five timesthe thickness of the gravity of the connecting weld lies outsideof this zone,
thinner part. Unless lateral deflection of the parts is the total stresses, including those due to the eccentricity
prevented, they shall be connected by at least two trans- from the centerof gravity of the angle, shall not exceed
verse lines of fillet, plug, or slot welds or by two or more those permitted by this specification.
longitudinal fillet or slot welds.
4.14.2 If longitudinal fillet weldsare used alone in lap

joints of end connections, the lengthof each fillet weld 5. Workmanship
shall be no less than the perpendicular distance between 5.1 General
the welds. The transverse spacingof the welds shall not
exceed 16 times the thickness of the connected thinner 5.1.1 All requirements of this section shall be ob-
part unless suitable provision is made (as by intermediate served in the production and inspection of welded assem-
plug or slot welds) to prevent bucklingor separation of blies produced by any of the processes acceptableunder
the parts. The longitudinal fillet weld may be either at the this specification.
edges of the member or in slots. 5.1.2 All items of equipment for welding and torch
cutting shall be (1) designed and manufactured and
4.14.3 When fillet welds in holes or slots are used, the
(2) be in proper condition to enable qualified welders,
clear distance fromthe edge of the hole or slot to the ad-
welding operators, and tack welders to follow the proce-
jacent edge of the part containing it, measured perpen-
dures and attain the results prescribed elsewherein this
dicular to the direction of stress, shall be no less than five
specification.
times the thickness of the part nor less than two times the
width of the hole or slot. The strengthof the part shall be 5.1.3 Welding shall not be done when the ambient
determined from the critical net section of the base temperature is lower than 0°F (-18OC), when surfaces
metal. are wet or exposed to rain, snow, or high wind velocities,
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
or when welding personnel are exposed to inclement
4.15 Corner and T-joints. Corner and T-joints that are conditions. The maximum permissible wind velocity will
to be subjected to bending about an axis parallel to the vary with the welding process and procedure. Heating,
joint shall have their welds arranged to avoid concentra- local protection from the elements, orboth, shall be used
tion of tensile stress at the root of any weld. as necessary.
4.16 Welds in Combination with Rivets and Bolts. In 5.1.4 The size and length of welds shall not be less
new work, rivets or bolts in combination with welds shall than those specified by design requirements and detail
not be considered as sharing the stress, and the welds drawings, except as permitted by 8.6(6), nor shall they
shall be provided to carry the entire stress for whichthe exceed those requirements by more than 25 percent with-
connection is designed. Bolts or rivets used in assembly out prior approval of the design change by the respon-
may be left in place if their removal is not specified. If sible Engineer. Also, the location of welds shall not be
bolts are to be removed, the plans should indicate changed without prior approvalof the design Engineer.
whether holes should be filled and in what manner.
5.2 Preparation of the Base Metal
4.17 Eccentricity of Connections
5.2.1 Surfaces and edges to be welded shall be
4.17.1 Eccentricity between intersecting parts and smooth, uniform, and free from fins, tears, cracks, and
members shall be avoided insofar as practicable. other visual defects that would adverselyaffect the qual-
ity of the weld. Surfaces to be welded and surfaces adja-
4.17.2 In designing welded joints, adequate provision cent to a weld shall be free from loose or thick mill scale,
shall be made for bending stresses due to eccentricity,if slag, rust, paint, moisture, and other foreign material, or
any, in the disposition and section of base metal parts and contaminants that will prevent proper welding or pro-
in the location and types of welded joints. duce hazardous fumes. Thin mill scale (that can with-
47
stand vigorous wire brushing), thin rust-inhibitive 5.2.5 Dimensional Tolerances. Dimensions of built-
coating, or antispatter compound (that will not cause up beams and girders shall be within the tolerance of the
problems with welding) need not be removed. general specification governing the work, and also
within the following special tolerances. All measure-
5.22 When oxyfuel gas cutting, the cutting torch shall
ments shall be taken at the manufacturer’s plant prior to
be adjusted and manipulated to avoid cutting beyond (in-
shipment, unless otherwise specified.
side) the prescribed lines. The roughnessof cut surfaces
shall not be greater than Sample No. 2 of AWS C4.1, 5.2.5.1 Maximum deviation from straightness, D,.
Surjizce Roughness Gauge, for material thicknessesup to (referenced to the neutral axis) of welded beams or gird-
2 in. (51 mm), and Sample No. 1 for material 2 in. (51 ers, where there is no specified sweep:
mm) to 8 in. (203 mm) thick. Surfaces exceeding the
above roughness values, and occasional notches or D,,in. = 0.0125 x total length, ft
gouges not exceeding 3/16 in. (5 mm) deep, shall be cor- D,, mm = 1.O4 x total length, m
rected by machining or grinding. Notches or other sharp
discontinuities exceeding 3/16 in. ( 5 mm) may be re- 5.2.5.2 Maximum deviation from specified camber
paired by welding only with the approval of the design (in the service position),D,, of welded beam or girders:
Engineer. Approved weld repairs shall be made only by
D,, in. = k0.003 x total length. ft, or +1/4 in.,
following a documented repair welding procedure that
shall contain the following: whichever is greater
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(1) Discontinuity removal and joint preparation. D,, mm = k0.25 x total length, m, or *6 mm,
(2) Welding process and filler metal to be used. whichever is greater
( 3 ) Preheat and welding variables and also any
postheat requirements necessary to comply with this 5.2.5.3 Lateral deviation between the centerlineof
specification. the web and the centerlineof the flange of buildup H or I
(4) Procedures for grinding the completed weld members at the contact surface (referenced to neutral
smooth and flush towithin the surface roughness accep- axis) shall be 1/4 in. (6 mm) maximum.
tance criteria of this paragraph. Weld repaired surfaces
5.2.5.4 The maximum deviation from the specified
and edges that will not be subsequently incorporated
depth for welded built-up beams and girders, measured
into a welding joint shall be stress-relieved by any ap-
at the web centerline, shall be f 1/2 in. (+ 13 mm) for
proved method when determined necessary by the design
depths up to 72 in. (1.8 m). For depths over 72 in.
Engineer.
(1.8 m), the maximum deviation shall be +3/4 to -112 in.
5.2.3 Machining, plasma arc cutting, air carbon arc (+19 to -13 mm).
cutting, oxyfuel gas cutting, oxygen gouging, chipping,
or grinding may be usedfor joint preparation,back goug- 5.2.6 Reentrant corners, except for the corners of
ing, and the removal of unacceptable work or metal. One weld-access cope holes adjacent to a flange, shall be fil-
exception is that oxygen gouging shall not be used on leted to a radiusof no less than 3/4 in. (19 mm). The fillet
quenched and tempered steel. Thermally cut surfaces and its adjacent cuts shall meet without offset or cutting
should be ground as needed to proper contour. past the point of tangency.
5.2.4 Edges of built-up beam and girder webs shall be 5.3 Visual Inspection and Repair of Plate and
cut to the prescribed camber with empirically developed Wrought Steel Products
manufacturing allowance for shrinkage due to cutting 5.3.1 In the repair and the determination of the limits
and welding. However, deviation from the specified of visible internal discontinuities on rolled, sheared, or
camber tolerances may be corrected by carefully super- oxygen-cut edges, the amount of metal removed shall be
vised application of a limited amount of localized heat or the minimum necessary to remove the discontinuity, but
other suitable means of obtaining the specifiedcamber. not to exceed the permissible limit given in Table 7. Plate
The use of flame straightening of distorted members cut edges may exist at any angle with respect to the
and camber correction by localized heating must have rolling direction. All repairs of discontinuities by weld-
the approval of the design Engineer and follow an ap- ing shall conform to the applicable provisions of this
proved written procedure (see 10.4).When flame straight- specification.
ening is used, the temperatureof the heated areas shall be
accurately measured. The temperature shall not exceed 5.3.2 The limits of acceptability and the repair of
1100°F (590°C) for quenched and tempered steels or visually observed edge discontinuities shall be in accor-
normalized and tempered steels, and 1200°F (650°C) for dance with Table 7. The length of discontinuity is the
other steels. visible length dimension on the plate edge, and the depth
48
Table 7
Limits on Acceptability and Repair
of Edge Discontinuities in Plate
Size of Discontinuity
Length, in. (mm) Depth, in. (mm) Repair Required
explored
be not
Unspecified
need
1None;
less
(25) or
Over 1 (25) 1/8 (3) max explored
Note
None;
should
depth
per
be 1
Over 1 (25) Over 1/8 (3) to 1/4 (6) Remove;
repair
welding not required
Over 1 (25) Over 1/4 (6)to 1 (25) Completely
remove
and
repair
weld
limited
as Note
by 2
Over 1 (25) Over 1 (25) to Refer 5.3.3
Notes:
1. A spot check of 10 percent of the discontinuities on the edge in question should be explored by grinding todetermine depth. If the depth of any one
of the discontinuities explored exceeds 118 (3 mm), then all of the discontinuities remaining on that edge shall be explored by grinding to determine
depth. If none of the discontinuities explored in the 10 percent spot check has a depth exceeding 118 in. (3 mm), then the remaining of the disconti-
nuities on that edge need not be explored.
2. Aggregate length of welding shall not exceed 20 percent of the length of the plate edge being repaired.
is the distance that the discontinuity extends into the determined as the area of total loss of back reflection
plate from the edge. when examined in accordance with the procedures of
ASTM A435.
5.3.3 Discontinuities over 1 in. (25 mm) in length and (2) For acceptance, the area of a single discontinuity
in depth, when discovered during eithervisual inspection or the aggregate areaof multiple discontinuities shallnot
of plate edges or nondestructive examination of welded exceed 4 percent of the plate area (length X width) with
joints, shall be evaluated further. The following proce- the following exception. If the width of discontinuity or
dures are recommended: the aggregate width of discontinuities on any transverse
(1) Where discontinuities, such as W, X, or Y in Fig- section, as measured perpendicular to the plate length,
ure 10 are observed prior to completing the joint, the size exceeds 20 percent of the plate width, the maximum al-
and shape of discontinuity shall be determined by ultra- lowable area shall be reduced by the percentage amount
sonic inspection. The area of the discontinuity shall be of the width exceeding 20 percent. For example,if a dis-
continuity is 30 percent of the plate width, the percentage
area of discontinuity cannot exceed 4 minus 4 x
(0.30-0.20), or 3.6 percent of the plate area.The discon-
1 MATERIAL WIDTH
h tinuity on the edge of the plate shall be gouged out to a
depth of 1 in. (25 mm) beyond its intersection with the
surface by chipping, air carbon arc gouging,or grinding,
and then blocked off by welding in layers not exceeding
1 in. (25mm) MIN 1/8 in. (3 mm) in thickness.
(3) Repair of an internal discontinuity,Z, in Figure 10
is not required if it does not exceed the allowable areain
5.3.3(2), is discovered after the joint
has been completed,
and is 1 in. (25 mm) or more from the toe of the weld as
measured on the plate surface. If a Type Z discontinuity
is less than 1 in. (25 mm) from the toe of the weld, it
shall be gouged out to a distance of 1 in. (25 mm) from
the weld metal. It shall then be blocked by welding in
layers not exceeding 1/8 in. (3 mm) in thickness.
(4) If the area of the discontinuity W, X, Y,or Z ex-
ceeds the allowable in 5.3.3(2), the plate or subcompo-
nent shall be either rejected and replaced or repaired at
the discretion of the design Engineer.
(5) The aggregate length of weld repair shall not ex-
ceed 30 percent of the length of the plate edge without
Figure 10-Edge Discontinuities in Cut Plate approval of the design Engineer.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
-
STD AWS DLY.L-ENGL
49
(6) All repairs shall be in accordance with this specifi- line of parts, unless otherwise shownon the drawing.De-
cation. Gouging of a discontinuity may be done from ei- viations from these limits shall be approved by the
ther the plate surface or the edge. design Engineer.
5.4 Assembly 5.4.4 Dimensions of the cross section of groove weld
5.4.1 Parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be
joint preparations that vary from those shown on the de-
tail drawings by more than the tolerances given in
brought as close together aspracticable at the joint. Root
Table 8 shall be referred to the design Engineer for ac-
cracking may occur in a fillet weld if there is no root
ceptance. Exceptions are grooves for electroslag and
opening between the parts (e.& surfaces machined to
electrogas welds.
bear). It may be necessary to provide a small root open-
ing, in such cases, prior to welding. In any case, the root 5.4.5 Grooves produced by gouging shall be in accor-
opening between parts shall not exceed 1/8 in. (3 mm) dance with the requirements for processes and filler met-
for sections up to 2 in. (51 mm) in thickness. When the als of Section 6 .
root opening between shapes or plates of 2 in. (51 mm)
or more in thickness cannot be closed to meet this toler- 5.4.6 Groove welds shall be terminated at the ends of
ance, a maximum root opening of 3/16 in. ( 5 mm) is a joint in a manner that will ensure sound welds. This
acceptable if a sealing weld or suitable backingmaterial3 should be done by the use of extension bars or run-off
is used. If the root opening is 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) or plates.
greater, the leg of the fillet weld shall be increased by the
5.4.7 Extension bars and run-off plates shall be re-
amount of the separation, or the contractor shall demon-
moved upon completion of the welding, and the ends of
strate that the required effectivethroat has been obtained.
the weld shall be finished smooth and flush with the
The separation between the faying surfaces of lap
edges of the abutting parts.
joints and butt joints with a backing shall not exceed
1/16 in. (1.6 mm). Deviations from these limits must be 5.4.8 The weld metal of groove welds made with steel
approved by the design Engineer. backing strips shall be thoroughly fused with the back-
5.4.2 Parts to be joined by partial joint penetration ing. Steel backings shall be removed, where accessible,
groove welds parallel to the lengthof the member (bear- from welds that are transverse to computed stress, and
ing joints excepted) shall be brought as close together as the joints shall be ground or finished smooth.
practicable. The root opening between parts shall not ex- 5.4.9 Members to be welded shall be brought into
ceed 1/8 in. (3 mm). If the root opening between rolled correct alignment and held i n position by clamps,
shapes or plates of 2 in. ( 5 1 mm) or greater in thickness wedges, guy lines, struts, tack welds, or other suitable
cannot be closed sufficiently to meet this tolerance, a devices until welding has been completed. The use of
maximum gap of 3/16 in. (5 mm) is acceptable provided jigs and fixtures is recommended where practicable.
( 1 ) a sealing weld or suitable backing material is used
and (2) the final weld meets the requirements for effec-
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
tive throat. Tolerances for bearing joints shall be in ac-
~~ ~ ~~
cordance with the applicable contractspecification or the

manufacturer's standard if no tolerances are included in
Table 8
the contract. Deviations from these limits must be ap- Tolerances for Groove Weld Joint
proved by the design Engineer. Preparations for Arc Welding (see5.4.4)
5.4.3 Abutting parts to be joined by groove welds Root
Not
Gouged
Root
Gouged
shall be aligned. Where the parts are effectively re-
strained against bending due toeccentricity in alignment, m. mm
mm in.
an offset not exceeding 1 O percent of the thickness of the
face Root +]/I6 21.6 limitedNot
thinner part joined, but i n no case more than 0.18 in.
(4.5 mm), may be permitted as a departure from the theo- Root opening with
retical alignment. In correcting misalignment in such steel than
other &]/I6 k1.6 k1/16 k1.6
cases, the slope of the drawn-in parts shall not exceed 1 backing
to 24. Measurement of offset shall be based upon center-
Root opening
with +1/4 +6 Not applicable
steel backing
3. Backingmaybeflux,glasstape, iron powder, or similar
materials.Sealant(root)passesshouldbemadewith low-angle Groove +5" +IO"
hydrogen covered electrodes or other arc welding processes. -5"
50
Suitable allowances shall be made for warpage and 5.5.6 In making welds under conditions of severe ex-
shrinkage. ternal shrinkage restraint, the weldingshall be carried
continuously to completionor to a pointthat will ensure
5.4.10 Steel backing shall be continuous for the full freedom from cracking before the joint is allowed to cool
length of a weld. Welded butt joints in a fabricated steel below the minimum specified preheat temperature.
backing shall have complete joint penetration, and the Where preheat and interpass temperatures arenot speci-
joints shall be welded prior toplacement of the backing. fied, welding shall continue to a point where freedom
from cracking isassured.
5.4.11 Caulking of welds isnot permitted.
5.6 Stress Relief
5.4.12 Tack Welds
5.6.1 All stress relief operations shall follow an ap-
5.4.12.1Tack welds shall be subject to the same proved written procedure.
quality requirements as the final
welds.
5.6.2 Localized stress relieving may be employed,
5.4.12.2 Tack welds which are incorporated into subject to approvalby the designEngineer, when it is im-
the final weld shallbe made with electrodes meetingthe practical to stress relieve the entire weldment.A written
requirements of the final weld. Multipass tack welds procedure must addressthe variables given in 5.6.3.
shall have cascaded ends. Tack welds shall be cleaned
prior to depositing additional weld
metal. 5.63 The proceduresfor furnace stressrelief must ad-
dress the following:
5.4.12.3 Tack welds not incorporated into final (1) Temperature at the start ofthe thermal cycle
welds shallbe removed. (2) Rate of heating to temperature
(3) Maximum allowable variation of temperature
5.4.13 Arc Strikes. Arc strikes outside the area of throughout the portion of the part being heated
permanent welds should be avoided on any base metal. (4)Maximum temperature tolerance at stress-relief
Cracks or blemishes caused by arc strikes shall be temperature
ground to a smooth contour and examined to ensure
(5) Holding time at stress-relief temperature
soundness (see 10.2.2).
(6) Rate of cooling to a temperature suitable forre-
5.5 Control of Distortion and ShrinkageStresses moval of workfrom the furnace
(7) The thermocouples shallhave surface contactwith
5.5.1 The procedure and welding sequence for assem- the weldment and be shielded from direct impingement
bling and joining parts of a structure or of built-up mem- of the heat source. The records shall include the location,
bers, and for welding reinforcing parts to members,shall calibration and thermal chart of each thermocouple,
be designed to minimize distortion and shrinkage. along with traceable weldment documentation. The
records and data shall become part of the weldment
5.5.2 All welds, insofar as practicable,shall be depos- documentation
ited in a sequencethat will balance the applied heat while (8) Support of the weldment to minimize saggingand
welding progresses. distortion
(9) Spacing of multiple items so all pieces will heat
5.5.3 A program for welding sequence and distortion uniformly
control shall be provided where shrinkage stresses or dis- (10) Use of baffles or insulating material to protect the
tortion are likely to affect the adequacyof the structure. weldment from direct impingement of the heat source.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
5.5.4 Joints that are expected toproduce large shrink- 5.7 Vibratory Conditioning
age should usually be welded with as little restraint as
possible before other joints that are expected to cause 5.7.1 Vibratory conditioning to obtain dimensional
less shrinkage are welded. stability of the weldment may be employed with the ap-
proval of the Engineer. The conditioningshall be done in
5.5.5 Peening may be used on intermediate weld lay- accordance with the recommendations of the manufac-
ers forcontrol of shrinkage stressesin thick welds to pre- turer of the vibratory equipment. It shall not be substi-
vent cracking (see5.8). No peening shall be done on the tuted for thermal stress relief.
root pass. Peening of the final weld layer shall be for fa-
tigue enhancement purposes only and shallbe done ac- 5.7.2 The conditioning process shallbe covered by a
cording to an approved written procedure (see 5.8.3). written procedure.
51
5.8 Peening. Shot and mechanical peening provide for The peening tool shall be made from a chisel or other
improved fatigue life in the weld joint as a resultof the tool designed for the pneumatic hammer. The tool tip
surface material being placed in compression.4.5*6 Me- shall conform to the dimensions shown in Figure lI(A).
chanical peening can be applied to intermediate weld All sharp edges and burrs shall be removed and the tool
passes to reduce residual stresses, cracking, and distor- shape maintainedin this geometric shapeand condition.
tion. All peening shallbe done using an approved written Best peening results will be obtained by operating the
procedure. pneumatic hammer at approximately 25 psi (1.7 bar) air
pressure. The axis of the hammer shall be perpendicular
5.8.1 Controlled Shot Peening. Controlled shot
to the longitudinal axisof the weld toe and inclined 60 to
peening may be used on external surfacesto improve fa-
70 degrees above the weld toe plane as shown in Figure
tigue life. Controlled shot peening procedures shall in-
ll(B). Peening is done by slowly moving the peening
clude Almen intensity, shot size, pressure, and percent
tool of an operating hammer along the weld toe. Peening
coverage.
shall continue until the weld toe becomes smooth (ab-
5.8.2 Hammer Peening. Hammer peening may be sence of weld ripples), approximately three to four
used on external surfaces to improve fatigue life. Peen- passes at 30 inches per minute (76 cm/min.). The depth
ing should be controlled to prevent introducing stress of indentation due to peening should be approximately
weld or base metal.
concentrations to, or cracking of, the 1/32 to 1/16 inch (0.8 mm to 1.6 mm).
Controlled air hammer peening procedures shall specify Peened welds, after passing the second magnetic par-
hammer size, peening tool radius, air pressure, and ex- ticle examination, have increased fatigue strength equal
tent and density of coverage (see 5.8.4). to thenext higher stress category (seeTable 3) forthe ap-
5.8.3 Peening Applications plicable detail (see Table 4 and Figure 1). However, the
stress category for peened welds shall not exceed cate-
(1) No peening shall be done onthe root pass: gory B.
(2) Hammer or needle peening may be used on inter-
mediate weld layers for control of shrinkage stresses in
thick welds to prevent cracking.
(3) Peening of the surface layer of the weld and the
6. Processes andFiller Metals
base metal at the edges of the weld is permitted for fa- 6.1 General
tigue life improvement. Under controlled conditions,
both shot and mechanical peening places the exposed 6.1.1 Filler Metal Requirements
material in compression which reduces residual tensile
6.1.1.1 The electrode, electrode-flux combination,
stresses at the weld surface, the toe of the weld, and the or other filler metal for making complete joint penetra-
base metal adjacent to the weld. tion groove welds shall be in accordance with Table 9
(4) All slag shall be removed prior to peening. The when matching weld metal is required by Table 2.
use of manual slag hammers, chisels, and lightweight
tools such as needle descaling guns for the removal of 6.1.1.2 The electrode. electrode-flux combination,
slag and spatter is permitted, but is not considered or other fillermetal for complete joint penetrationor par-
peening. tial joint penetration groove welds and for fillet welds
may provide lower strength weld metal, as permitted in
5.8.4 Specification for PneumaticHammer Peen-
Table 2. The allowable stress in the weld metal shall not
ing for Fatigue Life Improvement. Peening of weld
exceed that allowed in the table.
toes shallbe performed with theuse of a small pneumatic
hammer (Ingersoll#2 or equivalent) and peening tool as 6.1.2 Preheat and Interpass Temperature Require-
shown in Figure 11(A). All welds shall pass magnetic ments. Preheat and interpass temperatures shallbe in ac-
particle examination prior to peening, followed
by a sec- cordance with Table 10 for the welding process being
ond magnetic particle examination after peening. used and for the higher strength base metals being
welded.
4. Bremen, U., Smith, I. F. C., and Hirt, M.A. Crack Growth
Behavior in a Welded Joint Improved by Residual Stress 6.1.3 Heat Input Control for Quenched and Tem-
Method. InternationalConference:Fatigue of WeldedCon- pered Steel. When quenched and tempered steels are
struction, Ed., Maddox, S. J. The Welding Institute: 1987. welded, the heat input shall be restricted in conjunction
5. Booth, G. S., Improving the Fatigue Performance of Welded with the maximum preheat and interpass temperatures
Joints. The Welding Institute: 1983. permitted for the metal thickness. The heat input limita-
6. Metal ImprovementCompany,Inc. Shot Peening Applica- tions shallbe in accordance with the steel producer’s rec-
tion, Seventh Edition. ommendations. The use of stringer beads to avoid
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
52
1/2 in. HEX

OR ROUND
TYPICAL
(A) PEENING
TOOL
W32 OR
118 in. R. 4
VIEW A-A
60" TO 70"
(B) TYPICAL
I
CROSS
SECTION
\\'
AT PEENED
WELD
TOE
Figure ll-Pneumatic Hammer Peening (see5.8.4)
overheating is strongly recommended. Oxygen gouging low-hydrogen coverings conforming ANSUAWSto A5.5
of quenched and tempered steelis not permitted. shall be purchased in hermetically sealed containers,or
shall be dried for at least one hour at a temperature of
6.1.4 Backing for Groove Welds. Materials used for between 700°F (370°C)and 800°F (427°C) beforebeing
backing of groove welds may be steel,neutral submerged used, in accordance with the recommendations of
arc welding flux, nonfusible backup bars, or commer- ANSI/AWS A5.5. Electrodes shall be dried prior to use
cially available tapes made specifically for this purpose. if the hermetically sealed container shows evidenceof
The backing material employed shallnot alter the weld
damage.
metal composition, and the joints shallmeet the require-
Immediately after openingof hermetically sealedcon-
ments of Section 4,Weld Joint Design.
tainers or removal from drying ovens, the low-hydrogen
6.2 Shielded MetalArc Welding (SMAW) electrodes shallbe consumed or stored in ovens held at a
temperature of at least 250°F (12OOC). E7OXX or
6.2.1 Electrodes for Shielded MetalArc Welding E70XX-X electrodesthat are not used within four hours,
6.2.1.1 Electrodes for shielded metal arc welding E80XX-X within two hours, E90XX-Xwithin one hour,
shall conform tothe requirements of the latest edition of ElOOXX-X or EllOXX-X within one half hour, and
either ANSUAWS A5.1, Specification for Carbon Steel E70XXR, E7018M or E70XXHZR within nine hours
Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding,or ANSI/ after removal from hermetically sealed containers or
AWS A5.5, Specificationfor Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes from a drying or storage oven shallbe redried before use.
for Shielded Metal Arc Welding,whichever is applicable. Electrodes shallbe redried not more than one time. Elec-
trodes that are, or have been, wet shallnot be used.
6.2.1.2 All electrodes having low-hydrogen cov-
erings conforming to ANSIIAWS A5.1 shall be pur- 6.2.13 The classification and sizeof electrode, arc
chased in hermetically sealed containers, or shall be length, voltage and amperage shallbe suited to the thick-
dried for at least two hours between 500°F (260°C) and ness of the base metal, type of groove, welding position,
800°F (427°C) before being used. Electrodes having and other circumstances attending the work.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
S T D * A W S D1'4.1-ENGL 1997 078'iZbS 0509589 908
53
Table 9
Matching Filler Metal Requirementsapfle
Welding Process
)MAW Base SAW SMAW
Class I AWS
A5.1 or A5.5
AWS
A5.17 or A5.23
AWS
A5.18
AWS A520 or A5.29
Class II F6XX-EXXX
E70XX
E60XX,
E7XT-X,
ER70S-X
E6XT-X, or E7XTX-X
E7OXX-X
F7XX-EXXX
(except -14, -13, -10,
-2, -3, or CS)'
F7XX-EXX-XX
AWS
A5.18 or A5.28
E7OC-XX
Class III AWS
A5.1 or A5Sa AWS A5.17 or A5.23
AWS A5.18 AWS
A5.20 or A5.29
E7XT-X
ER70S-X
F7XX-EXXX
E70XXd or E7XTX-X
E70XX-Xd
F7XX-EXX-XX
(except -2, -3. -10, -13, -14, or CS)'
AWS A5.18 or A5.28
E70C-XX
A5.28AWS
Class IVA5.23AWS A5.5 AWS AWS A5.29
UTS >70 ksi F8XX-EXX-XX
E80XX-Xd
ER80S-X ESXTX-X
(>485 MPa)
UTS 570 ksi AwS A5.1A5.20

Or A5SAWSAWS
A5.18
A5.17
AWSor A5.23
(1485 MPa) E70XX-Xd E7XT-X
ER70S-X
F7XX-EXX or E7XTX-X
E70XXd F7XX-EXX-X
E70C-XX
(except -2, -3, -10, -13,
-14, or CS)'
Class V Thickness AWS A5.5 AWS A5.23 AWS A5.28 AWS A5.29
<2.5 in. (<65 mm) E I IOXX-Xd FllXX-EXX-XX ER 1 1OS-X E 1 1XTX-X
E11018M
22.5 in. (265 mm) E100XX-Xd
FlOXX-EXX-XX ER 100s-X El OXTX-X
E10018M
Notes:
a. The use of the same type of filler metal having the next higher strength classification as listed in AWS filler metal specifications is permitted. A
filler metal of a lower strength may be used where the Engineer has stipulated less than 100 percent joint efficiency.
h. In joints involving base metals of different yield points or strengths, filler metals applicable to the lower strength metal may be used.
c. These electrode classifications donot have yield strength or elongation requirements specified in ANSUAWS A5.20. If E7XT-2 filler metals are
qualified by prototype testing (see 7.5.3). this qualifies the use of these filler metals for production. However, it is recommended that these classifi-
cations and the E7XT-11 classification from ANSVAWS A5.20 be limited to weld thicknesses less than 1/2 in. ( I 3 mm).
d. Low hydrogen classifications only (¡.e., EXX15, EXXI5-XX, EXX16. EXX16-XX. EXX18, EXX18-XX. EXX28, EXX48).
e. When welds are to be thermally stress-relieved, the deposited weld metal shall not exceed 0.05 percent vanadium.
f. Filler metals of alloy groups 83, B3L, B4L. B5, B6, B6L, B7. B7L, B8. B8L, or B9, in ANSVAWS A5.5, A5.23. A5.28. or A5.29, are not prequal-
ified for use in the as-wclded condition.
6.2.1.4 The maximum size of electrodes shall be as (5) 3/16 in. ( 5 mm) for root passes of groove welds
follows: and for all other welds not included under (l), (2), (3),
( 1 ) 5/16 in. (8 mm) for all welds made in the flat and (4)
position, except for root passes
6.2.2 The minimum thickness of a root pass shall be
( 2 ) 1/4 in. (6 mm) for horizontal fillet welds
large enough to avoid weld metal cracking.
(3) 1/4 in. (6 mm) for root passes of fillet welds
made in the flat position and groove welds made in the 6.2.3 The maximum thickness of layers of fillet
flat position with a backing and a root opening of 1/4 in. welds, other than root passes, and all layers of groove
(6 mm)or more welds shall be the following:
(4) 5/32 in. (4 mm) for welds made with EXX14 (1) 1/4 in. (6 mm) for root passes of groove welds
and low-hydrogen electrodes in the vertical and overhead ( 2 ) 1/8 in. (3 mm) for subsequent layers of welds
positions made in the flat position
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
-
S T D - A W S D l q - L - E N G L L997 0 7 8 q 2 b 5 0507590 b 2 T
54
Table 10
Minimum Preheat and lnterpass TemperatureC
_ _ _ _ _ ~
Thickness of Thickest Part

Weldability
Classification of Point
at of Welding
Minimum
Temperaturea*
Metal Base mm "F "C
I Up
other
welding
with
Shielded
arc
metal to 3/4 Nonea
incl.19
electrodes
low-hydrogenthan over 3/4 19 Nonea
thru 1-1/2 38 incl.
Over 1-1/2 38 50 10
thN1/22- 64 incl.
112 2- Over 64 200 95
I Shielded
metal arc
Uplow-
welding
with to 3/4 19
Nonea
incl.
hydrogen electrodes, submerged arc Over 3/4 19 Nonea
welding, gasmetal arc welding, flux 1-112
thru 38 incl.
cored arc welding 1 Over - 112 38 Nonea
thru
/212- 64 incl.
Over 2- 1/2 64 150 66
II Shielded metal arc welding with otherUp to 3/4 19incl. Nonea
than low-hydrogen electrodes Over 314 19 150 66
thru I-ln 38 incl.
1-1/2
Over 38 107 225
thru 2- 1/2 64 incl.
Over 2- 1/2 64 300 150
II Shielded
&welding
III
Up
metal
arc
low-
with to 3/4 19Nonea
incl.
Over arc submerged
electrodes,
hydrogen 314 19 50 10
welding,gasmetalarcwelding,flux thw 1-1/2 38 incl.
1-1/2Over
weldingarc cored 38 150 66
thru 2-/21 64 incl.
Over 2- 1/2 64 225 107
welding
witharc
Shielded
metal
IV to Up 3/4
low- incl.19 50 10
hydrogen electrodes, submerged arc Over 150 3/4 19 66
welding, gas metal arc welding, flux thru 38 incl.
cored arc welding Over 1-1/2 38 107 225
1/2
thru
2- 64 incl.
Over 2- 1/2 64 300 150
Uplow-
welding
witharc
Shielded
metalV to 3/4 19 incl. 50 10
hydrogenelectrodes,submergedarcOver 3/4 19 125 50
welding with carbonor alloy steel wire, thm1-]/2 38 incl.
neutral or active fluxc, gas metal arc over 1-1/2 38 175 80
welding,
flux
coredarc
welding t h m 2-1/2 M incl. ~
107 225
V Up carbon
with
welding
Submerged
arc t o 3/4 inci. 19 50 10
alloy wire, steel fluxC Over 3/4 19 200 95
..__ - 1-112
thm .. .- incl.
-38- ......
38 Over 1-112 300 150

2-1/2
thru 64 incl.
Over 2-10 64 400 205
Notes:
a. When the base metal temperature is below 32°F (OOC), the base metal shall be preheated to atleast 70°F (21°C) for a distance equal to the thickness
of the part being welded, but not less than 3 in. (75 mm) both laterally and in advance of welding. This minimum temperature shall be maintained
during welding. Preheat and interpass temperature must be sufficient to prevent crack formation. Temperature above the minimum shown may be
required for highly restrained welds. For quenched and tempered steel, the maximum preheat and interpass temperatureshould not exceed 400°F
(250OC)for thicknessesup to 1-112in. (38 mm) inclusive or450°F (230°C)for greater thicknesses. When welding quenched andtempered steel,
heat input should not exceed the steel producer's recommendation.
b. In joints involving combinations of base metals, preheat shall be as specified for the higher strength steel being welded.
c. Neutral flux: flux whose primary purpose is toshield the weld metal.
Active flux: flux whose primary purpose is to deoxidize the weld metal.
Alloy flux: flux whose primary purpose is toalloy the weld metal.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
55
(3) 3/16 in. ( 5 mm) for subsequent layers of welds weld pass shall exceedthe width of the face of that weld
made in the vertical, overhead, and horizontal positions pass or throat cracking may occur (see Figure 12).
6.2.4 The maximum size of both single-pass and root- 6.3.1.7 Tack welds located in the roots of joints re-
pass fillet welds shall be the following: quiring specific root penetration, or in the form of fillet
(1) 3/8 in.(9.5 mm) in the flat position welds 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) and under i n size, shall not
(2) 5/16 in. (8 mm) i n horizontal and overhead produce objectionable changesin appearance of the weld
positions surface or result in decreased penetration. Tack welds
(3) 1/2 in. (13 mm) in the vertical position that will cause unsatisfactory weld characteristics shall
be reduced in size by any suitable means before welding.
6.2.5 The progression of welding in the vertical posi- Tack welds in the root of a jointwith steel backing of less
tion may be upward or downward, but only in the direc- than 5/16 in. (8 mm) thick shall either be reduced in size
tion or directions forwhich the welder is qualified. by any suitable means before welding or made continu-
6.2.6 Complete joint penetration groove welds that ous for the full length of the joint using a low-hydrogen
are made without the use of steel backing shall have the welding procedure. After any tack weld is reduced in
root of the first weld gouged or ground to sound metal size, care must be taken to clean the weld groove before
before the secondweld is started on the opposite side. proceeding.
6.3 Submerged Arc Welding(SAW) 6.3.2 Electrodes and Fluxes. The bare electrodes and
flux used in combination for SAW of a steel shall con-
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6.3.1 General Requirements form to the requirements of the latest edition of
6.3.1.1 Submerged arc welding (SAW) may be
performed with one or more single electrodes, one or
more parallel electrodes, or combinations of &le and
parallel electrodes. The spacing between multiple arcs
shall be such that the slag cover over the weld metal
produced by a leading arc does not cool sufficiently to 1
prevent proper fusion of the weld metal deposit from a
following electrode. SAW with multiple electrodes may DEPTH
be used for any groove or fillet weld pass.
6.3.1.2 The following paragraphs (6.3.1.3 through I t
6.3.1.7) governing the use of SAW are suitable for any
steel included in Table 1, other than quenched and tem- WIDTH - -
pered steels. Concerning the quenched and tempered
steels, it is necessary to comply with the steel producer’s
recommendations for maximum permissible heat input
and preheat combinations. Such considerations must
include the additional heat input produced in simulta-
neous welding on two sides of a common member.
6.3.1.3 The size of the electrode shall not exceed
1/4 in. (6 mm)diameter.
6.3.1.4 Surfaces on which submerged arc welds are

to be deposited and adjacent faying surfaces shall be
clean and free of moisture and other contaminants that
may have an adverse effect on weld quality.
6.3.1.5 Roots of groove or fillet welds may be
backed with copper, flux, glass tape,iron powder, or sim-
ilar materials to prevent melt-through, or be sealed by
means of root passes deposited using a low-hydrogen
welding procedure. Figure 12-Unacceptable Submerged Arc
6.3.1.6 Neither the depth nor the maximum width Weld Pass Where the Depth and Width
in the cross section of the weld metal deposited in each Exceed the Face Width
56
ANSYAWS A5.17, Specificationfor Carbon Steel Elec- metal may be made using higher welding current. The
trodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding or of maximum welding current to beused for fillet weldsin
ANSIIAWS AS.23, Specification f o r Low Alloy Steel the flat position shall be 1,OOOA.
Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding,
63.5 Procedures forSAW with MultipleElectmdes
whichever is applicable.
6.3.5.1 Submerged arc welds made with multiple
6 3 3 Condition of Flux. Flux used for SAW shall be
electrodes may be madein either the flat or horizontal
dry and free of contamination from dirt, mill scale, or
position. Single-pass, multiple-arc fillet welds made in
other foreign material. Flux shall be purchased in pack-
the horizontal position shallnot exceed 1/2 in. (1 3 mm)
ages that can be stored under normal conditions for at
in size.
least six months without affecting the welding character-
istics of the flux or the weld properties. Flux from dam- 6.3.52 The thicknessof weld layers is not limited.
aged packages shall be discarded or dried at a minimum In making the root pass of a grooveweld, either singleor
temperature of 250°F (1 20°C) for one hour before use. multiple electrodes may be used. Backing strips or root
Flux shall be placed in the dispensing system immedi- faces of the groove shall be of adequate thickness to
ately upon opening a package. Before using flux that has prevent melt-through. When the width of a groove in
been exposed tothe atmosphere in an open package, the which a layer of weld metal is to be deposited exceeds
top 1 in. (25 mm) shall be discarded. Fluxthat has been 112 in. (13 mm), multiple electrodes shall be displaced
wet shall not be used. laterally, or a stringer bead (split layer) technique shall
SAW flux that has not been melted during the welding be used to assure complete fusion. A stringer bead (split
operation may be reused after recovery by vacuuming, layer) technique shallbe employed when only two elec-
catch pans, sweeping, or other means. The welding trodes in tandem are used and the widthof a previously
fabricator shall have a system for collecting unmelted deposited layer exceeds 1 in. (25 mm).
flux, adding new flux, and welding with the mixture of
6.3.5.3 The welding conditions, including current,
these two, such that the flux composition and particle
arc voltage, speed of travel, and relative location of
size distribution at the weld puddle are relatively
electrodes, shall ensure that each pass will have complete
constant. Recrushed slagmay be used provided it has its
fusion with the adjacent base and weldmetals, and have
own marking, using the recrusher’s name and trade des-
no depressions or unacceptable undercut. Concavity of
ignation. In addition, each dry batch or dry blend (lot) of
initial weld passes shall not be excessive toavoid crack-
flux, as defined in ANSYAWS A5.01, Filler Metal Pro-
ing in roots of joints that are under restraint.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
curement Guidelines,shall be tested in conformance with
Schedule I of ANSI/AWS A5.01 and classified by the 6.3.5.4 The maximum welding current used in
contractor or recrusher perANSVAWS A5.17 or A5.23, making a groove weldshall be the following:
as applicable. (1) 700 A for any single electrodeor for parallel elec-
trodes when making a root pass of a multiple-pass weld
6.3.4 Procedures for SAW with a Single Electrode
in a groovehaving no root opening
6.3.4.1 Submerged arc welds may be made in ei- (2) 750 A for any single electrodeor 900 A for paral-
ther the flat or horizontal position. Single-pass fillet lel electrodes when making a rootpass in a groove hav-
welds made in the horizontal position shall not exceed ing steel backing or a spacer bar
5/16 in.(8 mm) in size. (3) IO00 A for any single electrodeor 1200 Afor par-
allel electrodes for all other passes except the root pass
6.3.4.2 The thickness of weld layers, except root
and the final layer
and surface layers, shall not exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm).
(4) Any suitable amperage for the final pass or layer
When the root opening is 1/2 in. (13 mm) or greater, a
multiple-pass stringer bead (split layer) technique shall 6.3.5.5 The maximum welding current to be used
be used. The stringer bead (split layer) technique shall when making a fillet weld shallbe lo00 A for a single
also be used in making multiple-pass welds when the electrode or 1200 Afor parallel electrodes.
width of the layer will exceed 9 8 in. (16 mm).
63.5.6 Multiple electrodes may be used in the root
6.3.4.3 The welding conditions, including current, of groove or fillet welds using a leading gas metal arc
arc voltage, and speed of travel, shall ensure that each electrode with gas shielding followed by multiple
weld pass will have complete fusion with the adjacent submerged arc electrodes provided that (1) the gas metal
base and weld metals, and have no overlapor unaccept- arc welding conforms to the requirements of 6.4, and (2)
able undercut. The maximum welding current used to the spacing between the leading gas metal arc electrode
make any weld pass with fusion to both facesof a weld and the first following submerged arc electrode is not
groove shallbe 800A, exceptthat the find layer of weld more than 15 in. (381mm).
S T D - A W S DlLI-L-ENGL L997 D 07Bq2b5 0507593 3 3 9 =
57
6.4 Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) and Flux Cored 6.4.3.1 Electrodes shall be dry and in suitable con-
Arc Welding (FCAW) dition for use.
6.4.1 Consumables 6.4.3.2 The maximum diameter of electrodes shall

be 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) for the flat and horizontal positions,
6.4.1.1 The electrodes and shielding medium for and 5/64 in. ( 2 mm) for the vertical and overhead
gas metal arc welding (GMAW) or flux cored arc weld- positions.
ing (FCAW) for producing weld metal with a minimum
specified yield strength of 60 O00 psi (415 MPa) or less 6.4.3.3 The maximum size of a fillet weld made in
shall conform tothe requirements of the latest edition of one pass shall be 1/2 in. (13 mm) for the flat and vertical
ANSVAWS A5.18, Specification for Carbon Steel Elec- positions, 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) for the horizontal position,
trodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding or and 5/16 in. (8 mm) for the overhead position.
ANSUAWS A5.20, Specification for Carbon Steel
Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding, as applicable. 6.4.3.4 The maximum fill pass thickness shall be
1/4 in. (6mm). Themaximum root pass thickness shallbe
6.4.1.2 Weld metal having a minimum specified 318 in. (9.5 mm) for the flat position, 5/16in (8 mm) for
yield strength greater than 60 O00 psi (415 MPa) shall the horizontal and overhead positions, and 1/2 in.
conform to the following requirements: (13 mm) for the vertical position. The stringer bead (split
(1) The electrodes and shielding gas for GMAW for layer) technique shall also be used in making all multi-
producing weld metal with a minimum specified yield pass welds (fillet or groove) when the width of the pre-
strength greaterthan 60 O00 psi (4 15 MPa) shall conform ceding layer exceeds 5/8 in. (1 6 mm).
with the latest edition of ANSI/AWS A5.28, Specifica-
6.4.3.5 The welding conditions used shall ensure
tion for Low Alloy Steel Filler Metals for Gas Shielded
that each pass will have complete fusion with adjacent
Arc Welding.
base metal and weld metal, and there will be no exces-
(2) The electrodesand shielding gas for fluxcored arc sive overlap,porosity, or undercutting.
welding for producing weld metal with a minimum spec-
ified yield strength greater than 60 O00 psi (415 MPa) 6.4.3.6 Complete joint penetration groove welds
shall conform to the latest edition of ANSYAWS A5.29, made without the use of steel backing shallhave the root
Specification forLow Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux of the first weld gouged to soundmetal before the second
Cored Arc Welding. weld is startedfrom the opposite sideof the joint.
6.4.1.3 When requested by the design Engineer, 6.4.3.7 Backing may be used to prevent melt-
the fabricator shall furnish the electrode manufacturer’s through at the roots of fillet welds and partial penetration
certification that the filler metal product being used met groove welds.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
the requirements for classificationin accordance with the
applicable AWS specifications. The manufacturer’s rec- 6.4.3.8 Welding with external gas shielding shall
ommended welding process conditions and parameters not be done in a draft or wind having a velocity exceed-
including amperage,voltage and shielding gas(or lack of ing five miles per hour unless the weld is protected by a
such) shall be followed. shelter. The shelter shall reduce the air velocity in the
vicinity of the welding to that necessary to avoid loss of
6.4.2 Shielding Gas. When a gas or gas mixture is gas shielding.
used for shielding duringGMAW or FCAW, it shall have
a dew point of -40°F (-40°C) or lower. When requested 6.5 Electroslag Welding (ESW) and Electrogas Weld-
by the design Engineer, the manufacturer shall furnish ing (EGW)
certification from the gas producer that the gas or gas
6.5.1 General Requirements
mixture is suitable for the intended application
and meets
the dew point requirement. 6.5.1.1 Electroslag Welding (ESW) and electrogas
welding (EGW) of quenched and tempered steels is not
6.4.3 Prequalified Procedures for GMAW’ and
permitted unless the heat-affected zone(HAZ) and weld
FCAW. The requirements for prequalified procedures
are heat treated subsequent to welding to obtain the re-
that are exempt from qualification testing are as follows:
quired mechanical properties.
7. Applies only when welding with the sprayor globular modes 6.5.1.2 Prior to use, the manufacturershall prepare
of metal transfer. Prequalification does not apply to short-cir- a welding procedure specification and qualify each
cuiting metal transfer. procedure for the process to be used in accordance with
58
the requirements of Section 7, Qualification. The weld-

ing procedure specification shall includethe joint details,
Table 11
filler metal type and diameter, welding current and type, Impact Strength Requirements for
voltage, speed of vertical travel (if not an automatic Electrogas and Electroslag Welds
~
function of arc length or deposition rate), oscillation Minimum

(traverse speed, distance, anddwell time) type of shield- Average Minimum
ing (including flow rate and dew point of gas or type of Specimen
Size
Impact
Strength
Impact
Strength
flux), type of molding shoe, postweld heat treatment(if in. mm ft lb J ft lb J
required), and other pertinent information.*
0.394x0.394 lox 10 15.0 20.3 10.0 13.6
6.5.2 Impact Strength Requirements. Impact tests
shall be included in the welding procedure qualification.
6.5.2.1 Five CharpyV-notch impact test specimens

from the weld metal and five specimens from the HA2
shall be machined from the same weld test assembly 6.5.4 Electrodes and consumable guide tubes shall
be
made to determineweld joint properties. dry, clean, andin suitable condition foruse.
6.5.2.2 The impact specimens shall be machined 6.5.5 A gas or gas mixtureused as shielding for elec-
and tested in accordance with ASTM E23, Standard trogas welding shall be of a welding grade and have a
Methodsfor Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Ma- dew point of -40°F (-"C), or lower.
terials, or ANSIIAWS B4.0, Standard Methods for Me- 6.5.6 The flux used for electroslag welding shallbe
chanical Testing of Welds, for Charpy impact specimens. dry and free of contamination from dirt, mill scale, or
6.5.2.3 The longitudinal centerline of the speci- other foreign material. Flux from packages damaged in
mens shall be transverse to the weld axis and shallbe lo- transit or handling shall be discardedor dried at a mini-
cated as near as practicable to a point midway between mum temperature of 250°F (120°C) for one hour before
the surfaceand center of thickness. Thebase of the notch use.
shall be perpendicular to the surface. The standard 6.5.7 Procedures for Electroslag and Electrogas
.0.394 in.x 0.394 in. (10 mm x 10 mm) specimenshall be Welding
used where the thickness is 1/2 in. (13 mm) or greater.
6.5.7.1 Electrogas welding shall not be done in a
6.5.2.4 When computing the average value of the draft or wind unless the weld area is protected by a
impact properties, the lowest value and highest value shelter. This shelter shall be designed to reducethe wind
obtained for each set of five specimens tested shall be velocity in the vicinity of the weld to conditions where
disregarded. the gas shielding is not disrupted.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6.5.2.5 The notched bar impact properties of the 6.5.7.2 The type and diameter of the electrodes
weld metal of the remaining three specimens shall be used shall meet the requirements of the welding proce-
no less than the values in Table 11 when tested at 0°F dure specification.
(-1 8°C).
6.5.7.3 Welds shall be started in such a manner as
6.53 All-Weld-Metal Tension Tests.Prior to use, the to permit sufficient heat buildup for complete fusionof
fabricator shall demonstrate by appropriate tests that the weld metal to the groove faces of the joint. Welds
each combination of shielding mediaand filler metal will stopped at any point in the length of the jointshall be
produce welds having the mechanical properties speci-
examined in accordance with Section 8, Weld Quality
fied in the latest edition of ANSYAWS A5.25 or A5.26, and Inspection andrepaired if necessary.
or as listed in Table 12.
6.5.7.4 Preheating of base metals isnot normally
8. The resistance of an electroslag or electrogas weld to center- required. However, welding shall not be performed when
line hot cracking is related to the angle at which the dendritic the base metal at the point of welding is below 32°F
grains meet as solidification of the weld metal proceeds. This (OOC).
angle is determined by the shape of the molten weld pool. In
general, if the angle is acute (less than
90 degrees), the cracking 6.5.7.5 Welds not meeting the quality requirements
resistance will be high. Refer to the Welding Handbook. Vol. 2, of Section 8 shall be repaired utilizinga qualified weld-
7th Ed., pages 243-245 for additional information. ing process.
59
Table 12
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements for Electrogas and Electroslag Welds
Minimum
Tensile
Strength
Minimum
Yield
Point
Minimum Elongation,%
Base Metal MPa ksi MPa ksi in 2 in. (51 mm)
ASTM A36 415 60 250 36 24

ASTM A242 or A441, thickness:
3/4 in. (20345
22 mm) or less50 485 70
2 315 3/4
46 Over 460 to 67 1-1/.2mm)
in. (2CL38
1-1/2 Overin.
(38-102 244 290
to 42
mm) 435 63
4 Over
in. to 8 mm) (1 02-203 24 275
60 40 415
ASTM A572:
Grade 42 415 60 290 42 24
Grade 45 60 310 415 45 22
Grade 50 450 65 345 50 21
Grade 55 70 380 485 55 20
Grade 60 515 75 415 60 18
Grade 65 550 80 450 65 17
ASTM A588, thickness:
4 in. (102 mm)or less 485 70 50 345 21
460mm)
Over 4 to 5 in. (102-127 67 315 46 21
435mm)
Over 5 to 8 in. (127-202 63 290 42 21
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
7.Qualification facturer, fabricator, or contractor, be in writing and

signed by an authorized individual, and be available to
those authorized to examine them. A suggested form
showing the information required in a welding procedure
Part A specification is shown in Annex A. The welding parame-
General Requirements ters set forth in ( I ) through (4) of this subsection shall be
specified on the written welding procedure specifications
within the limitations of variables prescribed in 7.5 for
7.1 Approved Procedures each applicable process. Changes in these parameters,
beyond those specified on the written welding procedure
7.1.1 Joint welding procedures that conform in all re- specification, shall be considered essential changes, and
spects to the provisions of Section 2 , Base Metals; Sec- shall require a new or revised written prequalified weld-
tion 4, Weld Joint Design; Section 5 , Workmanship; and ing procedure specification.
Section 6 , Processes and Filler Metals, shall be deemed (1) Amperage (wire feed speed)
prequalified and are exempt from tests or qualifications, ( 2 ) Voltage
except that all groove andfillet weld procedures for weld (3) Travel Speed
metal and base metal with a minimum specified yield (4) Shielding Gas Flow Rate
strength of 90 O00 psi (620 MPa) or higher shall be qual-
ified prior to use by tests as prescribed in 7.2 of this sec- 7.1.3 A combination of qualified or prequalified joint
tion to the satisfaction of the Engineer. welding procedures may be used without requalification,
provided the limitations of essential variables applicable
Note: The use of a prequalified joint welding proce- to each process are observed. This combination of joint
dure is not intended as a substitute for engineering welding procedures shall be written as a single welding
judgement in the suitability of application of these joint procedure specification.
welding procedures to a welded assembly or connection.
7.1.4 Procedures previously qualified under earlier
7.1.2 All prequalified joint welding procedure specifi- editions of this specification, ANSI/AWS Dl .l,
cations (WPS) to be used shall be prepared by the manu- Structural Welding Code-Steel, ANSIIAWS B2.1, Spec-
S T D - A W S DLqmL-ENGL
60
$cation for Welding Procedure and Performance Quali- 7.3.2 Radiographic examination of a welder’s or
fication, or Section IX of the ASMEBoiler and Pressure welding operator’s qualification test plate, or test pipe,
Vessel Code for equivalent welding shall be acceptable may be madein lieu of the guided bend test prescribed in
under this specification, subjectto the limitations of vari- Parts C and D of this section.
ables in Section 7. In addition, Standard Welding Proce-
dure Specifications (WPSs) published by the AWS
7.4 Qualification Responsibility. Each manufacturer or
contractor shall conduct the tests required by this specifi-
Committee on Welding Qualification are acceptable,
cation to qualify the welding procedures and thewelders,
subject to the limitations of variables in Section 7. New
welding operators, and tack welders who will use these
qualifications shall be made in accordance with the re-
procedures.
quirements of this specification, or the latest edition of
B2. i , subject to the limitationsof variables in Section 7.
7.1.5 Testing of new processes, filler metal^,^ and
fluxes shallbe qualified by the following: Part B
(1) For groove welds, the reduced-section tension test Procedure Qualification
and the guided bend test shall be used. As an alternative,
a simulated proof testlo of the applicable joint may be
used subject to the design Engineer’s approval. 7.5 Qualification of Welding Procedures
(2) For fillet weld applications only, the transverse or To qualify a welding procedure by test, the manufac-
longitudinal fillet weld tests (Figures13A and B) shall be turer shall choose testing according to 7.6 through 7.14
used. As an alternative, a simulated proof test of the or prototype testing according 7.5.3.
to
applicable joint may be used, subject to the design 7.5.1 The following rules apply when it is necessary
Engineer’s approval. to establish a welding procedure by qualification as
7.2 Other Procedures. Except for those procedures required by 7.2 or the contract specifications, and the
exempted in 7.1.1,joint welding procedures that are em- procedure shall be recorded by the manufacturer as a
ployed in executing contract work under this specifica- welding procedure specification.
tion shall be qualified prior to use by tests as prescribed
7.5.1.1 Qualification of a welding procedure using
in Part B of this section to the satisfaction of both the
a steel that is listed in Table 1, but not in 7.5.1.2,and has
purchaser’s appointed representative and the manufac-
a minimum specified yield point of less than 50 O00 psi
turer’s designated representative responsible forwelding.
(345 MPa) shall qualify the procedure for welding any
The purchaser’s appointed representative should accept
other steelor combination of steels listedin the table that
evidence of previous qualification of any joint welding
have a minimum specified yield point equal to or less
procedures tobe employed.
than that of the base metal used in the test.
7.3 Welders, Welding Operators, and Tack Welders
7.5.1.2 Qualification of a welding procedure estab-
7.3.1 All welders, welding operators, and tack welders lished with ASTM A l 3 I , Grades AH,DH, or EH; A515;
to be employed under this specification shallhave been A537, Class 1; A572, Grade 42 through 50; or API 5LX,
qualified by tests as prescribed in Parts C, D, and E, Grade 42 shall be considered as procedure qualification
respectively, of this section or by the latest editionof for welding any other steel or combination of steels in
ANSI/AWS B2. I . Purchaser’s representatives, at their this group, or other steels includedin Table 1 that have a
discretion, should accept evidence of previous qualifica- lower minimum specifiedyield point.
tion of the welders, welding operators, and tack welders
to be employed. A suggested form showing the informa- 7.5.1.3 Qualification of a welding procedure estab-
tion required is shown in Annex A. lished with a basemetal included in Section 2, Base Met-
als, and having a minimum specified yield strength
greater than 50 O00 psi (345 MPa) shall qualify the pro-
9. The term new process orfiller metal refers to a newly applied cedure forwelding only base metals of the same material
process or afiller metalthathasnopreviousqualification
specification and grade or typethat have the same mini-
record by the manufacturer for the intended application.
10. Simulatedprooftestsarenowincludedto utilize certain mum specified yield strength as the base metal tested, the
workmanshipspecimens.TheCommitteeconsideredcertain permitted reduction in yield strength for increasedmate-
cases where joints of odd or unusual configuration would not rial thickness being excepted. For example, a procedure
lend themselves to the reduced-section tension or guided bend qualified with a 1 in. (25 mm) thick, 100 O00 psi
tests, andagreedthat such joints may be tested underactual (690 MPa) yield strength base metal also qualifies for a
loadconditions.This is also intendedforjointsloadedin 3 in. (76 mm) thick, 90 O00 psi (620 MPa) yield strength
fatigue. base metal of the same material specification.
i
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
S T D - A W S DL4.L-ENGL L777 078LIZb5 0507597 T 8 4 m
61
112 in.
\
INOTE
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
\ /
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"""_
"
"
L
-
112 in. DISCARD
S = SPECIFIED SIZE OF FILLET WELD

T = S + 1/8 in.
Note: Length should be sufficient for required number of test specimens, which may be of any convenient width not less than 1 in.
(25.5 mm). Specimens shall be machine cut from assembly.
Figure 13A"Transverse Fillet Weld Shear Specimen --````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
7.5.1.4 Qualification of a welding procedure estab- dure specification, the manufacturer or contractor shall
lished with a combination of base metals included in report the specific values for the essential variables in
Table 1 of different minimum specified yield strengths, 7.5.2. The suggested form for showing the information
one of which is greater than 50 O00 psi (345 MPa), shall required is shown in Annex A.
qualify the procedure for welding that high yield strength
base metal to any other of those base metals that have a 7.5.2 Limitationsof Variables. The changes set forth
minimum specified yield strength equal to or less than in 7.5.2.1 through 7.5.2.5 shall be considered essential
that of the lower strength base metal used in the test. changes in a welding procedure. Any changes exceeding
the limitations thereof shall require establishment of a
7.5.1.5 The variables listed in 7.5.2 are essential new procedure incorporating those changes by qualifica-
variables of a joint welding procedure.In preparing the tion. When a combination of welding processes is used,
procedure qualification record and the welding proce- the variables applicable to each process shall apply.
62
-t I O in. APPROX. _I_

I
i
/i l
10 in. APPROX.
f I
tsd STEP 1
I II II 1
STEP 3
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
S = SPECIFIEDSIZE OF FILLETWELDALL DIMENSIONS ARE ININCHES.
S T1 T2 W B C
118 114 114 3 1-112
114 112 318 3 1-112
318 314 112 3 1-112
112 1 3-112' 518 1
ALL 3 Submerged Arc Welding
ALL 2 All other processes
'For 7 in. (178.0 mm) on each end of the base plates, the 3-112 in. (89.0mm) width may
have to be reduced to 3 in. (76.0 mm) to accommodate the jaws of the test machine.
Figure 13B"longitudinal Fillet Weld Shear Specimen
63
7.5.2.1 Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) A (2) A change increasing the filler metal strength
change in any of the following variables requires requali- level (for example, from 80 ksi to 90 ksi, but not vice
fication of the WPS: versa).
(1) A change increasing filler metal strength levels (3) A change in electrode diameter when using an
(for example, a change from E70XX(-X) to ESOXX-X, active flux.I2
but not vice versa). (4) A change in the number of electrodes used.
(2) A change from a low-hydrogen-type electrode to a (5) A change in the type of current (ac or dc) or
nonlow-hydrogen-type electrode, butnot vice versa. polarity when welding quenched and tempered steel, or
(3) An increase i n the diameter of the electrode when using an active flux.
used over that called for i n the welding procedure (6) A change of more than 10 percent above or
specification. below the specified mean amperage or wire feed speed
(4) A change of more than 15 percent above or below for each electrode diameterused.12
the specified mean arc voltage or amperage for each size (7) A change of more than 7 percent above or below
electrode used." the specified mean arc voltage for each diameter elec-
(5) For a specified welding groove, a changeof more trode used.12
than k 25 percent in the specified number of passes. If (8) A change of more than 15 percent above or below
the areaof the groove is changed,it is also permissibleto the specifiedmean travel speed.I2
change the numberof passes in proportion to the change (9) A change of more than 10 percent, or 1/8 in.
in area. (3 mm), whichever is greater,in the longitudinal spacing
of multiple arcs.
(6) A change in position in which welding is done, as
(10) A change of more than 10 percent, or 1/16 in.
defined in 7.8.
(1.6 mm), whichever is greater, in the lateral spacing of
(7) For a change in groove type: multiple arcs.
(a) A change in the type of groove (a change from
a V-groove to U-groove for example), except qualifica-
*
(1 1) A change of more than 10 degreesin the angular
position of any parallel electrode.
tion of a complete joint penetration groove weld qualifies (12) A change in the angle of electrodes in machine or
for any groove detail which complies with the require- automatic welding of more than
ments of 4.10.1. (a) *3 degrees in the direction of travel
(b) A change in the type of groove to a square- (b) * 5 degrees normal to the direction of travel
groove or vice versa. (1 3) For a specified groove, a change of more than k25
(8) A change in the shape of any one type of groove percent in the specified number of passes. If the area of
exceeding the tolerances given in Section 4, Weld Joint the groove is changed, it is permissible to change the
Design, involvingthe following: number of passes in proportion to change in the area.
(a) A decreasein the included angle of the groove (14) A changein position in which welding is done as
(b) A decrease in the root opening of the groove defined in 7.8.
(c) An increase in the root face of the groove (1 5 ) For a change in groove type:
(d) The omission, but not inclusion, of backing (a) A change in the type of groove (a change from
material a V-groove to U-groove for example), except qualifica-
tion of a complete joint penetration groove weld qualifies
(9) A decrease of more than 25°F (14°C) in the mini-
for any groove detail which complies with the require-
mum specified preheat or interpass temperature.
ments of 4.10.1.
(10) In vertical welding, a change in the progression (b) A change in the type of groove to a square-
specified forany pass from upward to downward,or vice groove or vice versa.
versa. (16) A change exceeding the tolerance of Section 4,
(1 1) The omission, butnot the inclusion,of backgouging. Weld Joint Design, i n the shape of any one type of
( 1 2 ) The addition or deletion of postweld heat treatment. groove involving
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(a) A decrease in the included angle of the groove

7.5.2.2 Submerged Arc Welding (SAW)
(b) Adecrease in the root opening of the groove
(1) A change in the electrode-flux combination not (c) An increase in the root face of the groove
covered by ANSVAWS A5.17 or A5.23. (d) The omission, but not inclusion, of backing
material
11. Whenweldingquenchedandtemperedsteel,anychange
withinthelimitation of variablesshallnotincreasetheheat 12. Anactive flux is defined as a flux upon which the alloy
input beyond the steel producer's recommendations. content of the weld metal is largely dependent.
64
(17) A decreaseof more than 25°F (14°C) in the mini- (b) A change in the type of groove to a square-
mum specified preheat or interpass temperature. groove or vice versa.
( 18) An increase in the diameter of the electrodeused (13) A change exceeding the tolerance of Section 4,
over that called for in the welding procedure specification. Weld Joint Design in the shape of any type of groove
( 1 9) The addition or deletion of supplemental pow- involving:
dered, granular, or cut wire fillermetal. (a) A decreasein the included angle
(20) An increase in the amount of supplemental pow- (b) A decreasein the root opening
dered, granular, or cut wire fillermetal. (c) An increase in the root face
(21) If the alloy content of the weldmetal is largely de- (d) The omission, but not inclusion, of backing
pendent on the composition of supplemental powdered material
filler metal, any change in the joint welding procedure (14) A decrease of more than 25" F (14" C)in the min-
that would result in the content of important alloying ele- imum specified preheator interpass temperature.
ments in the weld metal not meeting the chemical re- (1 5 ) In vertical welding, a change in the progression
quirements given in the welding procedure specification. specified for anypass from upward to downward,or vice
(22) The omission, but not the inclusion, of back- versa.
gouging. (16) A change in type of welding current (acor dc),
(23) Theaddition or deletion of postweld heattreatment. polarity, or mode ofmetal transfer across the arc.
( 17) The omission, but not the inclusion, of backgouging.
7.5.2.3 Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW). A ( 18) The addition or deletion of postweld heat treatment.
change in any of the following variables requiresrequali- ( 19) When required, an increase of more than10 per-
fication of the WPS: cent in the heat input (combination of travel speed, cur-
(1) A changein the electrode and method of shielding rent and voltage).
not covered by ANSVAWS A5.18 or A5.28.
(2) A changein filler metal to one of higher strength 7.5.2.4 Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW). A
level, but not vice versa (for example, ER70S-X to change in any of the following variables requiresrequali-
ERSOS-X). fication of the W S :
(3) A changein electrode diameter. (1) A change in the electrodeand method of shielding
(4) A changein the number of electrodes used. not covered by ANSVAWS A5.20 or A5.29.
( 5 ) A change from a single shielding gas to any other (2) A change increasingthe filler metal strength level
single gas or to a mixture of gases, or a change in speci- (for example, from E70T-X to E80TX-X, but not vice
fied composition of a gas mixturenot covered by ANSV versa).
AWS A5.18 or A5.28. (3) An increase in the diameter of electrode used over
(6)A change of more than 10 percent above or below that called for in the welding procedure specification.
the specified mean amperageor wire feed speed for each (4) A changein the number of electrodes used.
diameter electrode used.I2 (5) A change from a single shielding gas to any other
(7) A change of more than 7 percent above or below single gas or to a mixture of gases, or a change in the
the specified mean arc voltage for each diameter elec- specified composition of a gas mixture not covered by
trode used. I ANSVAWS A520 or A5.29.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(8) A changeof more than 10 percent above or below ( 6 )A change of morethan 10 percent above or below
the specified mean travel speed.'* the specifiedmean amperage or wire feed speed for each
(9) An increase of 25 percentor more or a decreaseof size of electrode used.'*
IO percent or more in the flow rate of the shielding gas. (7) A change of more than 7 percent aboveor below
(10) For a specified groove, a changeof more than *25 the specified mean arc voltage for each sizeof electrode
percent in the specified number of passes.If the area of used.'*
the groove is changed, it is permissible to change the (8) A changeof more than 10 percent above or below
number of passes in proportion to the change in area. the specified mean travel speed.'*
(1 1) A changein the position in which welding is done (9) An increase of 25 percentor more or a decrease of
as definedin 7.8. 10 percent or more, in the rate of flow of shieldinggas.
(12) For a changein groove type: (IO) For a specified groove, a changeof more than *25
(a) A change in the type of groove (a change from percent in the specified number of passes.If the area of
a V-groove to U-groove for example), except qualifica- the groove is changed, it is permissible to change the
tion of a complete joint penetration groove weld qualifies number of passes in proportion to the change in area.
for any groove detail which complies with the require- (1 1) A changein the position in which welding is done,
ments of 4.10.1. as defined in 7.8.
65
(12) For a change in groove type: (1 1) A change to a combinationwith any other welding
(a) A change in the type of groove (a change from process or method.
a V-groove to U-groove for example), except qualifica- (12) A change in postweld heat treatment.
tion of a complete joint penetration groove weld qualifies (13) A change in design of molding shoes, either fixed
for any groove detail which complies with the require- or movable, from nonfusing solid to water-cooled, or
ments of 4.10.1. vice versa.
(b) A change in the type of groove to a square- (14) A change exceeding 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) in filler
groove or vice versa. metal diameter.
( 1 3) A change exceeding the tolerance of Section 4, (15) A change exceeding 10 in./min (4 m d s ) in filler
Weld Joint Design, in the shape of any type of groove metal oscillation traverse speed.
involving: (16) A change in filler metal oscillation traverse dwell
(a) A decrease in the included angle time exceeding 2 seconds, except as necessary to com-
(b) A decrease in the root opening pensate for variationin the joint opening.
(c) An increase in the root face (17) A change in filler metal oscillation traverselength
(d) The omission, but not inclusion, of backing that affects, by more than 1/8 in. (3 mm), the proximity
material of filler metal to the molding shoes.
(14) A decrease of more than 25'F (14°C) in the mini- (IS) A change in flux burden exceeding 30 percent.
mum specified preheator interpass temperature. (19) A change in shielding gas flow rate exceeding 25
(15) In vertical welding, a change in the progression percent.
specified forany pass fromupward to downward, or vice (20) A change in design of molding shoes, either fixed
versa. or movable, as follows:
(16) A change in type of welding current (ac or dc), (a) Metallicto nonmetallic, or vice versa
polarity, or mode of metal transfer across thearc. (b) Nonfusingto fusing, or vice versa
(17) The omission, but not the inclusion, of backgouging. (c) A reduction in any cross-sectional dimensionor
( 1 8) The addition or deletion of postweld heat treatment. area of solid nonfusing shoe exceeding25 percent
(19) When required, an increase of more than 10 per- (21) A change in welding position from the qualified
cent in the heat input (combination of travel speed, cur- verticality by more than 10 degrees.
rent and voltage). (22) A change of welding currentfrom ac to dc,or vice
versa, or a change in electrode polarity for direct current.
7.5.2.5 Electroslag Welding(ESW) and Electro- (23) A change in welding power volt-ampere charac-
gas Welding (EGW).A change in any of the following teristics from constant voltage to constant current, or
variables requires requalificationof the WPS: vice versa.
( 1 ) A change in filler metal or consumable guidetube (24) A change i n welding voltage exceeding 10
metal composition. percent.
(2) A change in the metal core cross-sectional area of (25) A change exceeding 1/4 in. (6 mm) in the root
the consumable guide tube exceeding30 percent. opening of a square-grooveweld.
(3) A change in flux system (cored, magnetic elec- (26) A change in groove design that reduces the cross-
trode, external flux, etc.). sectional area.
(4) A change in flux composition, including consum- (27) A change in speed of vertical travel, if not an
able guidetube covering. automatic function of arc length or deposition rate,
(5) A change in shielding gas composition by a change exceeding 20 percent except as necessary to compensate
in flow of any one constituent of a mixture by more than for variation in joint opening.
5 percent of the total gas flow.
7.5.3 Prototype Testing
( 6 ) A change either in welding current exceeding 20
percent or a change in wire feed speed exceeding 40 7.5.3.1 With prior agreement between the pur-
percent. chaser and the manufacturer, welding procedures may be
(7) A change in groove design, other than a square- qualified by utilizing prototype structuresor components
groove, that increases the groove cross-sectional area. that comply with the minimum performance criteria as
(8) A change in joint thickness (T) outside the limits follows:
of O.5T to 1. IT where T is the thickness used for the (1) Simulated service tests of a welded assembly or a
procedure qualification. rnockup of the welded joint. The simulated service test
(9) A change in number of electrodes. must include impact loading, loading in bending, static
( 1 O) A change from single-pass to multiple-pass, or loading, or fatigue testingto duplicate the type of loading
vice versa. the joint will be subjected toin service.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
66
(2) A field test of the welded assembly on a machine 7.7 Base Metal. The base metal and the preparation for
loaded and performing the work for which it was welding shall be that specified in the procedure specifi-
designed. cation being qualified.For all typesof welded joints, the
length of the welded joint and dimensionsof the base
7.5.3.2 For simulated serviceor field tests, the fol-
metal shall provide sufficient material for the required
lowing shall be documented and recorded:
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
test specimens.
(1) The weldment drawing to which the test part or
assembly was made 7.8 Position of Test Welds
(2) The material specifications of all items included in
the assembly 7.8.1 All welds that will be encountered in actual con-
(3) The detailed welding procedure employed includ- struction shall be classified as flat, horizontal, vertical,or
ing welding process, filler metal, joint preparation, pre- overhead. Welding position limitations for procedure
heat, welding conditions, and sequence of weld passes qualification are shownin Table 14.
(see Annex A)
(4) The type of loadingapplied, direction, and mag- 7.8.2 Plate Groove Weld Tests. When making tests
nitude of forces (by calculation or instrumentation), to qualify welding procedures for groove weldsin plate,
frequency and total numberof applications, or specific test plates shall be welded in each of the positions to be
duration of the test qualified as follows:
(5) The results of visual examination andnondestruc-
(1) Position 1G (flat)-The test plates shall be placed
tive testing of all welded joints subjectedto loading in
in an approximately horizontal plane and the weld metal
the test
deposited onthe upper side. See Figure 14(A).
(6)The results of destructive testsof weldments
(2) Position 2G (horizontal)-The test plates shall be
7.5.3.3 The welding procedure employed for the placed in an approximately vertical plane with the
test assembly shallbe considered qualified provided the groove approximately horizontal. See Figure 14(B).
following aremet: (3) Position 3G (vertical)-The test plates shall be
(1) Visual and any required nondestructive examina- placed in an approximately vertical plane with the
tions, prior to test, meet the requirements of Section 8, groove approximately vertical. See Figure14(C).
Weld Quality and Inspection.
(4) Position 4G (overhead)-The test plates shall be
(2) Specified examinations conducted after test assure
placed in an approximately horizontal plane, and the
performance criteriaare met.
weld metal deposited on the under side. See Figure
7.5.3.4 A test assembly welding procedure must be 14(D).
requalified when a change in an essential variable ex-
ceeds the limits for the welding process (see 7.5.2.1 7.8.3 Pipe Groove Weld Tests. When making tests to
through 7.5.2.5). qualify welding procedures for groove welds in pipe, test
pipes shall be welded in each of the positionsto be quali-
7.6 Types of Tests and Purposes. Thetests that are used
fied as follows:
to determine themechanical properties and soundnessof
welded joints made to qualify welding
a procedure are as (1) Position 1G (pipe horizontal, rolled)-The test
follows: pipe shall be placed with its axis horizontal and the
groove approximatelyvertical. The pipe shall be rotated
7.6.1 Groove Welds The testsfor groove welds are as during welding so the weld metal is deposited on the
follows: upper side. See Figure 15(A).
(1) Reduced-section tension test for tensile strength (2) Position 2G (pipe vertical)-The test pipe shall be
(2) Root-, face-, and side-bend tests for soundness placed with its axis vertical to the welding groove
(3) Radiographic test for soundness approximately horizontal. The pipe shallnot be rotated
(4) Ultrasonic test for soundness during welding. See Figure 15(B).
(5) All-weld-metal tension test for mechanical (3) Position 5G (pipe horizontal, fixed)-The test
properties pipe shall be placed with its axis horizontal and the
(6)Impact test for toughness groove approximately vertical. The pipe is not rotated
(7) Macroetch test for soundness andweld size in par- during welding. See Figure 15(C).
tial joint penetration groove welds
(4) Position 6G (pipe inclined, fixed)-The test pipe
7.6.2 Fillet Welds. Fillet welds should be macroetch shall be inclined at 45 degrees with the horizontal. The
tested for soundnessand fusion. pipe is not rotated during welding. SeeFigure 15(D).
67
VERTICAL;
PLATES
HORIZONTAL
PLATES
AXIS OF WELD
HORIZONTAL
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(A) TEST POSITION 1G W
(FLAT)
(B) TEST POSITION 2G
(HORIZONTAL)
PLATES VERTICAL; PLATES HORIZONTAL

AXIS OF WELD
(C) TEST POSITION 3G (D) TEST POSITION 4G

(VERTICAL) (OVERHEAD)
Figure 14-Positions of Test Plates for Groove Welds
7.8.4 Fillet Weld Tests. When making teststo qualify (4) Position 4F (overhead)-The test plates shall be
welding procedures for fillet welds, test plates shall be so placed that each fillet weld is deposited on the under-
welded in each of the positions tobe qualified as follows: side of a horizontal surfaceand against a vertical surface.
(1) Position 1F (flat)-The test plates shall be so See Figure 16(D).
placed that each fillet weld is deposited with its axis and
Note: There are no provisions for separate tests to
face approximately horizontal, and its throat approxi-
qualib welding proceduresfor pipe fillet welds.Pipe
mately vertical. See Figure 16(A).
groove weld tests will qualify welding procedures for
(2) Position 2F (horizontal)-The test plates shall be pipe fillet welds.
so placed that each fillet weld is deposited on the upper
side of a horizontal surface and against vertical
a surface. 7.9 Joint Welding Procedure
See Figure 16(B).
7.9.1 The procedure for welding a joint shall comply
(3) Position 3F (vertical)-The test plates shall be in all respects with the welding procedure specification.
placed in an approximately vertical plane,and each fillet
weld deposited on vertical surfaces with the axis of the 7.9.2 Cleaning during the welding of test weld shall
weld vertical. See Figure16(C). be done in the welding position being qualified.
WELD FLAT (i15").DEPOSIT
FILLER METAL AT OR NEAR THE TOP.
"
(A) TEST POSITION 1G

I (PIPE HORIZONTAL
AND ROTATED) I
WELD HORIZONTAL(*15").
(B) TEST POSITION 2 6 '15" 15"'

15" 15" (PIPE OR TUBE VERTICAL ANDFIXED)
WELD FLAT, VERTICAL, OVERHEAD.
(C) TEST POSITION 5 6

(PIPE OR TUBE HORIZONTAL(i 15") AND FIXED)
(D) TEST POSITION 6 0

(PIPE INCLINED (45' t So) AND FIXED)
Figure 15-Positions of Test Pipe or 'Ibbing for Groove Welds
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
69
AXIS OF WELD
THROAT HORIZONTAL
OF WELD
AXIS OF WELD
HORIZONTAL
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NOTE: ONE PLATE MUSTBE HORIZONTAL
(A) TEST POSITION 1F (B) TEST POSITION 2F

(FLAT) (HORIZONTAL)
AXIS OF WELD VERTICAL

I
AXIS OF WELD
HORIZONTAL
...
NOTE: ONE PLATE MUSTBE HORIZONTAL
(C) TEST POSITION 3F (D) TEST POSITION 4F

(VERTICAL) (OVERHEAD)
Figure 16-Positions of Test Plates for Fillet Welds
7.10 Test Specimens 7.10.1.3 Nondestructive Testing.Procedure quali-

fication test plates, pipe or tubing (Figures 17A through
7.10.1 Complete Joint Penetration GrooveWelds E) shall be radiographically or ultrasonically examined
for soundness before preparing the required mechanical
7.10.1.1 The type and number of test specimens test specimens. Radiographic or ultrasonic testing shall
that must be tested to qualify a welding procedure are apply only to that portion of the weld in test plates be-
shown in Table 13, together with the range of thickness tween the discard strips, except that a minimumof 6 in.
that is qualified for use in construction. The range is (152 mm) of effective weld length shall be examined.
based on the thickness of the test plate, pipe, or tubing The full circumference of a completed weld in pipe or
used in making the qualification test. tubing shall be examined. The welding procedure is
unacceptable if the test results do not conform to the
7.10.1.2 Test specimens to qualify groovewelds in requirements of 7.12.
T-joints or corner joints shall be butt joints having the
same groove configurations as the T-joints or corner 7.10.1.4 Mechanical Testing.Test specimens shall
joints to be used in construction. be prepared by cutting the welded test plate, pipe,or tub-
70
Table 13
Number andType of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualifiecb
Groove Welds
Procedure Qualification; Complete Joint Penetration
1.Tests on Plate
Test Specimens Required
Reduced-
Section Side Face Root
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Tension Bend Plate Thickness Bend Bend

Plate Thickness(T) Number of Sample (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig. (seeQualified,
Fig. T. in.
Tested, in. Welds per Position NDTB 18A) 18C) 18C) 18D) Maximumb
1/8I T c 3/8 1 I Yes 2 2 2 - 2T118 to
3/8 1 I Yes 2 2 1 2 - 3/4
3/8c T c 1 1 I Yes I 2 - - 4 2T
1 and over 1 1 Yes 1 2 - - 4 Unlimited
Note: All welded test plates shallbe visually inspected (see 7.12.7).
a. A minimum of 6 in. of effective weld length shall be examined by radiographic or ultrasonic testing priorto mechanical testing.
b. For square groove welds, qualification shallbe limited to thickness tested.
2. Tests onPipe or Tubing
Pipe. Size of
T Test
Specimens
Rwuired I Pipe or Tube
Size
Qualified
r
Sample Weld Number of Specimens 1 I I wall Thickness,
in.
Reduced-
Number ~ Side
of Sample Bend
Diameter
Sch.
in.2
I Thickness
80
Welds per
NDTa
Position
(see Fig.
18D) Max
or 2 Yes - through .674

3Sch.
in. 40
6 in. Sch. 120
or 1 Yes 4 and 0.187
8Sch.
in. 80
Job Size Pipeor Tubing
21/- over
Any
Note: All welded test pipesor tubing shall be visually inspected(see7.12.6).

a. For pipe or tubing, the full circumferenceof the completedweld shall be examined by radiographic or ultrasonic testingprior to mechanical testing.
Table 13 (Continued)
3. Tests on Electroslag and Electrogas Welding
ÏI Plate
Thickness
Number
(T)
Tested, in. Sample
Welds
of
NDTa
Reduced- All-Weld
(see Fig.
ISA)
Side Metal Section
Bend Tension
(see Fig. (see Fig.
18B) 18D)
ImpactTension
Plate Thickness Testsb
(see 6.5.2) Qualified, T, in.
Tc I 1 I Yes 2 I 1 I 4 I 5 I OST-l.lT
Note: All welded test plates shall be visually inspected (see 7.12.7).
a. 6 in. minimum length of weld shall be examined by radiographic or ultrasonic testing prior to mechanical testing (see 7.10.1.3).
b. If required.
c. T is the test plate thickness.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ing as shown in Figures 17A through E, whicheveris ap- penetration groove weld, three macroetch cross section
plicable. The specimens shall be prepared for testing in test specimens arerequired.
accordance with Figures 1SA through D, as applicable.
7.10.2.4 If a joint welding procedure is not covered
7.10.1.5 When material combinations differ mark- by either 7.10.2.2 or 7.10.2.3, or if the welding variables
edly in mechanical bending properties, as between two do not meet a prequalified status or have not been used
base materials or between the weld metal and the base and tested for a complete joint penetration groove weld,
metal, longitudinal bend tests (face and root) may be then a test sample joint must be prepared. The first test
used in lieu of the transverse face- and root-bend tests. on the joint isto make a macroetch test to determine the
The welded test assemblies conforming to 7.10.1.3shall effective throat of the weld. Next, material is machined
have test specimens prepared by cutting the test plate as from the bottom side of the joint until its thickness is
shown in Figures 17D or 17E, whichever is applicable. equal to the effective throat of the weld. Tension and
The test specimens for the longitudinal bend test shall be bend test specimens shall then be prepared from the test
prepared for testing as shown in Figure 1SC. joint, and tests performed as required for complete joint
penetration groove welds (see 7.10.1).
7.10.2 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds 7.10.3 Fillet Welds. A T-shaped specimen with a
7.10.2.1 A sample weld shall be made using the double fillet weld, as shown in Figure 19, shall be made
type of groove design and joint welding procedure to be for each welding procedure and welding position to be
used i n construction, except that the depth of groove used in construction. One of the test welds shall be the
maximum size single-pass fillet weld, and the other test
need not exceed 1 in. (25 mm). If the partial joint pene-
weld shall be the minimum size multiple-pass fillet weld
tration groove weld is to be used for corner or T-joints,
to be used in construction. The weldments shall be cut
the butt joint shall have a temporary restrictive plate in
perpendicular to the direction of welding at three loca-
the plane of the square faceto simulate a T-joint configu-
tions, as shown in Figure 19. One face of each of the
ration. The sample weld shall first be visually examined
three cuts shall be prepared for macroetch examination in
to 7.12.7 and, if applicable, further examinedas follows:
accordance with 7.1 I .2.
7.10.2.2 For joint welding procedures which con- 7.10.4 Test specimens may be aged between 200 and
form in all respects to sections 5 and 6, Processes and 225°F (93-104°C) for 46 to 50 hours when required by
Filler Metal Workmanship, three macroetch cross section the filler metal specification applicable to the weld metal
specimens shall be prepared to demonstrate that the des- being tested.
ignated effective throat (obtained from the requirements
of the procedure specification) is met. 7.10.5 Qualification on pipe shall also qualify for
plate, but not vice versa. One exception is that qualifica-
7.10.2.3 When a joint welding procedure has been tion on plate in the 1 G (flat) or 2G (horizontal) positions
qualified for a complete joint penetration grooveweld shall qualify for welding groove welds and fillet welds in
and is applied to the welding conditions of a partial joint pipe or tubing that is over 24 in. (610 mm) in diameter.
72
\TOP OF
POSITIONS
6G
AND
PIPE FOR 5G \ TOP OF PIPE FOR 5G
6GAND POSITIONS
TOP OF PIPE FOR !X
AND 60 POSITIONS
SIDE -
BEND
T ROOT-" r SIDE
BEND BEND LTENSION
SPECIMENS
SPECIMENS
BEND
TENSION
Figure 17B"Location of Test

Figure 17A"Location of Test Specimens on Welded
Specimens on Welded Test Pipe
Test Pipe 2 in. or 3 in.in Diameter 6 in. or 8 in. in Diameter
- DIRECTION OF ROLLING +
........................
DISCARD THIS PIECE
"""kd""" ...................
""_
"""
------
-=.$a
SIDE BEND SPECIMEN
"""
""_
""" """
REDUCED SECTIONTENSION SPECIMEN

"""
- ~ $ ~ - - - - - - """
SIDE BEND~PECIMEN
"""
MIN 24 SPECIMENS
IMPACT
""_
EXTENSIONS NEED NOT
BE USED IF THE JOINT
IS OF SUFFICIENT LENGTH
TO PROVIDE 17 in. OF
""-
""- SOUND WELD EXCLUSIVE
OF RETESTS.
""-p"~="-- ""
REDUCED SECTION'TENSION SPECIMEN

_""
"c.>:<."".
"V" ""-
"""
"-"
""- SIDE BENDSPECIMEN
P""" -----
".". z..;
DISCARD M I S PIECE
12MIN 4- Tl2 FOR T = 3/4 in.
'
1
I OR LESS
L T14 FOR OVER 3/4 in.

OR AS NEAR AS
PRACTICABLE TOTl4
THE GROOVE CONFIGURATION SHOWNIS FOR ILLUSTRATION ONLY.

THE GROOVE SHAPE USED SHALL CONFORM TO THAT BEING QUALIFIED.
Figure 17C"Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plate-

Electroslag and Electrogas Welding-Procedure Qualification
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
DIRECTION OF ROLLING +
A
- - - DISCARVTHT~
- - ~PIECE "---
t ""V
n I p..:.....:.:.:.:.:.:
.: [Tr---
.................
6 MIN
1""_ ñ "-
T
""_
2 MIN
""h
n
a
-.
I
t
--
-- --
- +DIRECTION OF ROLLING
DlscARFy;&.............:.:
6 MIN
I 2o
LONGITUDINAL
I I
""*
""
n
cc
I
I REDUCEDSECTIÖN TENSION SPECIMEN

6 MIN
56: LONGITUDINAL
"- "".
"-SIDE BEND...SPECIMEN
"".
I - - REDUCED
""
--
I
*- "-
. "-
........
"- =a---=-
"-SIDE BEND SPECIMEN 15 MIN
1
2 MIN SECTION
TENSION
SPECIMEN I
==,+q= .. = = = :
7- &fd
....F,
SECTION TENSION SPECIMEN
6 MIN
SIDE
""+:W====:
""
BEND
DISCARD:THIS
"I SPECIMEN
.........
........
c"
WHEN IMPACT TESTS ARE REQUIRED, THE SPECIMENS SHALL BE

REMOVED FROM THEIR LOCATIONS, AS SHOWNIN FIGURE 17C.
(1) LONGITUDINAL
BEND
SPECIMENS (2) TRANSVERSE
BEND
SPECIMENS
. ....
.:.:.:.:.:.:.......
B
.............
'*A;<:;?;:!*
..........
..:.:.:.:.:
.........
..:.:.:i

Figure 17D"Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plate

Over 318 in. Thick-Procedure Qualification
Welding position limitations for procedure qualification 7.11.2 Macroetch Test.The weld test specimens shall
are shown in Table 14. be prepared with a finish suitable for macroetch exami-
nation. A suitable solution shall be used for etching to
7.11 Method of Testing Specimens accentuate the gross structure of the weld and any ex-
7.11.1 Reduced-Section Tension Specimens.Before posed internal discontinuities.
testing, the least width and corresponding thickness of
the reduced section shall be measured. The initial cross- 7.11.3 Root-, Face-, and Side-Bend Specimens
sectional area shallbe obtained by multiplying thiswidth
by the thickness. The specimen shall be ruptured under 7.11.3.1 Each specimen shall be tested in a guided
tensile load, and the maximum load shall be determined. bend test jig. Any convenient means may be used to
The tensile strength shall be obtained by dividing the move the plunger member with relation to the die
maximum load by the initial cross-sectional area. member.
74
- DIRECTION OF ROLLING
*
r
-
n
- * :.>:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.
::;:x::; j= -
"-
--
"-
DIRECTION OF ROLLING
It - - - DISCAR~TH~S
- 1
o
=
U ==- I
3 LONGITUDINAL l==r
.:.:.:.:.&.:.:
$:>s:>xig
:i<*;:.:.:.
RÖOTBEND SPECIMEN
I
* q = -PIECE-- ,,.>..:.:a
ZTION TENSION SPECIMEN "-1
r BgNDgpEcIMEN
30
'"t
6 MIN
""
I
"
"
ROO1
FACE BEND SPECIMEN

I
IN
L
2 MIN ""
"
"
"
"
ROOT' BEND SPECIMEN
t a2
6 MIN
"
O
"
I
LONGITUDINALROOTBENDSPECIMEN
FACE
.:.:<,:.:.:+:
4 ----4
4......... ~~
L "-" DISCARD THIS PIECE

- -
REDUCED SECTIO'NTENSION SPECIMEN
I=---- A ..........
d ----
~~
DISCARD THIS PIECE

:<:
WHEN IMPACT TESTS ARE REQUIRED, THE SPECIMENS SHALL BE

REMOVED FROM THEIR LOCATIONS, AS SHOWNIN FIGURE 17C.
(1) LONGITUDINAL
BEND SPECIMENS (2) TRANSVERSE BEND SPECIMENS

Figure 17E-Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plate

3/8 in. Thick-Procedure Qualification
7.11.3.2 Thespecimenshallbeplacedonthedie 7.11.3.4 Whenusingawraparoundjig,thespeci-

member of the jig with the weld at midspan. Face-bend men shall be firmly clamped on one endso that it does
specimens shall be placed with the face of the weld not slide during the bending operation. The weld and
toward the die member. Root-bend and fillet-weld- heat-affected zones must be completely in the bent
soundness specimensshall be placed with the root of the portion of the specimen after testing. Test specimens
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
weld toward the die member.Side-bend specimens shall are to be removed from the jig after the bending roller
be placed with the side showing thelarger discontinuity, has been moved 180 degrees from the starting point.
if any, facing the die member.
7.11.3.3 The specimen shallbe forced into the die 7.11.4 All-Weld-Metal Tension Test.The test speci-
until it assumes a U-shape aroundthe plunger. The weld men shall be tested in accordance with the latest edition
and heat-affected zones must be centered and completely of ANSYAWS B4.0,Standard Methods for Mechanical
within the bent portion of the specimen after testing. Testing of Welds.
75
MACHINE WELD REINFORCEMENT

FLUSH WITH BASE METAL
THESE EDGES
OXYGEN-CUT
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
"""
+-THS
I SECTION
PREFERABLY BY MILLING MACHINE THE MINIMUM AMOUNT

NEEDED TO OBTAIN PLANE PARALLEL
FACES OVER THE REDUCED SECTION
Dimensions
Test Plate Test Pipe
~___ ~~ ~ ~~ ~~
6 in. & 8 in.

2 in. & 3 in.
Diameter or
Tp 5 1 in. 1 c Tp c 1-1/2 in. Larger Diameter
Tp 2 1-1/2 in.
Widest faceof weld + 112 in., 2-1/4
A-Length of reduced section Widest faceof weld + 1/2 in., 2-114 min
min
L-Overall
length,
(Note
min 2) As required
testing
byequipment As requiredby testing equipment
W-Width
reduced
of section
(Notes 3, 1-112
4) * 0.01 1 f 0.01 1 i 0.01 1/2 i 0.01 3/4 f 0.01
C-Width section
(Notes
of grip 4, 5) 2 1 -1/2 1-1/2 1 approx. 1-1/4 approx.
1-Specimen thickness (Notes 6,7) Maximum possible with plane

TP TP Tp/n (Note 7) parallel faces within length A
n fillet, of r-Radius 1/2 112 112 1 1
Notes:
1. Tp = thickness of the plate.
2. It is desirable,if possible, to make the lengthof the grip section large enoughto allow the specimento extend into the grips a distance
equal to two-thirds or moreof the lengthof the grips.
3. The ends of lhe reduced section shall not differ in width by more than 0.004 in. Also, there may be a gradual decrease in width from
the endsto the center,but the widthof either end shall not be more than 0.015 in. largerthan the width at the center.
4. Narrower widths (W andC) may be used when necessary. In such cases, the width of the reduced section should be as large as the
width of the material being tested permits.If the width of the material is less thanW, the sides may be parallel throughout the length
of the specimen.
5. For standard plate-type specimens, the ends of the specimen shall be symmetrical with the centerline of the reduced section within
0.25 in. except for referee testing, in which case the ends of the specimen shall be symmetrical with the center line of the reduced
section within0.10 in.
6. The dimension t is the thickness of the specimen as provided for in the applicable material specifications. The minimum nominal
thickness of 1-1/2 in. wide specimens shall be3/16 in. except as permitted by the product specification.
7. For plates over 1-1/2 in. thick, specimens may be cut into the minimum number of approximately equal strips not exceeding1-1/2 in.
in thickness.Test each strip and average the results.
Figure 18A-Reduced-Section Tension Specimens
S T D - A U S DILI-1-ENGL L997 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0 5 0 9 b L 2 O10
76
Dimensions
~ ~~~
Standard
Specimen
Small-Size
Specimens Proportionalto Standard
Diameter
Nominal 0.500
Roundin. Roundin.
0.350 Roundin.
0.250
G-Gage length 2.000 i 0.005 1.400 i 0.005 1 .O00 0.005
D-Diameter (Note 1) 0.500 0.010 0.350 0.007 0.250i 0.005
r-Radius of fillet, min W8 114 W1 6
reduced of A-Length section (Note 2), min 2-114 1-3/4 1-114
Notes:
1. The reduced section may have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center, withthe ends not more than one percent larger in
diameter than the center (controlling dimension).
2. If desired, the length of the reduced section may be increased to accommodate an extensometer of any convenient gage length.
Reference marks for the measurement of elongation should be spaced atthe indicatedgage length.
3. The gage length and fillets shall be as shown, but the ends may be of any formto fit the holders of the testing machine in such away
that the load shall be axial. If the ends are to be held in wedge grips, it is desirable, if possible,to make thelength of the grip section
great enoughto allow the specimen to extend into the grips a distanceequal to two-thirds or more of the length of the grips,
Figure 18B-All-Weld-Metal Tension Specimens
7.11.5 Radiography. The radiographic procedure and etched surfaces. Partial joint penetration groove welds
technique shall be in conformance tothe requirements of must have the designated effective throat. Fillet welds
Section 8,Weld Quality and Inspection. must show fusion to the root of the joint, but not neces-
sarily beyond, and both legs must be equal to within
7.11.6 Ultrasonic Testing. The ultrasonic procedure 118 in. (3 mm). Convexity must not exceed the limits
and technique shall be in conformance to the require- specified in 8.7.
ments of Section 8.
7.12.4 All-Weld-Metal TensionTest (Electroslag
7.12 Test Results Required
and Electrogas). The mechanical propertiesmust equal
7.12.1 Reduced-Section TensionTest. The tensile or exceed those specified in Table 12.
strength must not be less than the minimum of the speci-
7.12.5 Nondestructive Testing.The weld soundness,
fied tensile range of the basemetal.
as revealed by either radiographic or ultrasonic testing,
7.12.2 Root-, Face-, and Side-Bend Tests. The con- must conform to the requirements of Section 8, Weld
vex surface of the specimen shall be examined for the Quality and Inspection.
appearance of cracks or other open discontinuities.A
specimen shall be considered as failed when a crackor 7.12.6 Visual Inspection-Pipe and lhbing. For ac-
ceptable qualification, a pipe weld must conform to the
other open discontinuity exceeding 1/8 in. (3 mm), mea-
sured in any direction, is present after the bending. Cracks following requirements.
occurring on the comers of the specimen may be 1/4 in. 7.12.6.1 The weldshall be free of cracks.
maximum length, provided there is no evidence of slag
inclusions or otherfusion-type discontinuities. 7.12.6.2 All craters shall be filled to the full cross
section of the weld.
7.12.3 Macroetch Tests. The macroetched surfaces
of the specimens shall be examined for discontinuities. 7.12.63 The face of the weld shall be at least flush
and the welds shall be considered as failedwhen discon- with the outside surface of the pipe, and the weld shall
tinuities prohibited by 8.6 are observed on the macro- merge smoothly with the base metal. Undercut shall not
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
77
k- 6 MIN 4- BEND
i 4 FACE- 4 ROOT- BEND
PLATE
OVER
PLATE
TEST
TEST
3/8 in.
318 in. THICK
p
f:............
.............
..:.:.,:.:+,,
j:::::::::::,
NOTE 2 Y
(1) LONGITUDINAL BEND SPECIMEN
6 MIN (SEE NOTE l ) " - ~
.:.:.i:.,.,.:
.:.:.:.>:.:.:.
:.
...............
.......
.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.
...............
NOTE 3
t
x p I
A
L1 t
"r
:.....
i..:;.:
.....
-f
FOR CLEANUP
FACE-BEND SPECIMEN
6 MIN(SEENOTE 1 ) d r RADIUS 118 MAX-7

...............
........
..............
........
.......
.......
...............
.........
...............
......
..............
.......
...............
..........
............. c
NOTE 2
MATERIAL TO BE REMOVED
FOR CLEANUP
f """" -
.......
:.:.:.... (PIPE) (PLATE)
"r (.::
NOTE 3 _/" 318

ROOT-BEND SPECIMEN
(2) TRANSVERSE BEND SPECIMENS
Dimensions
in. Width,
SpecimenTestWeldmentTest
Plate 1-112
Test pipe 2 in. and 3 in. in diameter 1
Test DiDe 6 in. and 8 in. in diameter 1-112
Notes:
1. A longer specimen length may be necessary when using a wraparound-type bending fixture or when testing steel with a yield strength
of 90 ksi or more.
2. These edges may be oxygen-cut and may or may not be machined.
3. The weld reinforcement and backing,if any, shall be removed flush with the surface of the specimen. If a recessed backing is used,
this surface may be machinedto a depth not exceeding the depthof the recessto remove the backing; in such cases, the thickness
of the finished specimen shallbe that specified above. Cut surfaces shall be smooth and parallel.
4. T = plate or pipe thickness.
5. When the thicknessof the test plate is less than318 in. (9.5 mm) use the nominal thickness for face and root bends.
Figure 18C -Face- and Root-Bend Specimens
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
70
6 in. (150 mm).

I 118 in. (3
MIN
r-""
118 in.
(9.5 mm) RADIUS 118 in. MAX-
IF OXYGEN-CUT, ALLOW MIN
NOT LESS THAN 118 in. TO BE
MACHINED FROM EDGES
-m;-1
L
......
.:.:.:.:.:.::::::x::
.:k.:.:.:.F$:w:
.........._...
.:.:.:.:.:
._.....
:::::A
.:.:.:
.:.:.
..:;.el'..
........._._.
..:.:.:..
:.:.:..
.
WHEN T EXCEEDS 1-112in. (38.1 mm),

i:.'
.:.: :.:..
7 1 c',
T. in. 1. in.
318 to 1-112 T
CUT ALONG THIS LINE. EDGE MAY > 1-112 See
Note 2
BE OXYGEN CUT.
Notes:
1. A longer specimenlength may be necessary whenusing a wraparound-type bending fixture or when testing steel with a yield strength
of 90 ksi or more.
and 1-112in. and test each strip.
2. For plates over1-112in. thick, cut the specimeninto approximately equal strips with t between 3/4
3. T = plate or pipe thickness.
Figure 18D-Side-Bend Specimens
Weld
Size T, min' T2 min'
Y16 1 I2 W1 6
314 1 I4
1 U16
1 W8
1 12 1 1 12
518 1 W8
34 1 W4
5 3/4 1 1
MACROETCH TEST
SPECIMEN
'Note: Where the maximum plate thickness used in production is less than the value shown in the table,the maximum thickness of the
production pieces maybe substituted for T, and T*.
Figure 19-Fillet Weld Soundness Test for Procedure Qualification
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
79
Table 14
Procedure Qualification-Type and Position Limitations (see 7.10.5)
5 p e of Weld and Positionof Welding Qualified*
Test Qualification
Weld Plate or Pipe Positions**

Fillet Groove
Groove Fillet
Plate-groove 1G F F F F
2G H F,H F, H F. H
3G V V
4G OH OH
Plate-fillet 1F F F,
2F F. H F, H
3F V V
4F OH OH
Pipe-groove 1G Rotated F F F F
2G F, H F, H F, H F?H
5G F, V, OH F, V, OH F, V, OH F, V, OH
6G F, H, V, OH F, H, V, OH F, H, V, OH F, H, V, OH
Notes:
a. Qualifies for a welding axis with an essentially straight line and specifically includes plates, wrought shapes, fabricated sections. and rectangular
fabricated sections and pipe or tubing over 24 in. (610 mm) in diameter, except for complete joint penetration welds in tubular T-. Y-,and K-con-
nections. This includes welding along a line parallel to the axis of round pipe.
b. Qualifies for fillet and groove welds in all positions except for complete joint penetration groove welding of T-, Y-, and K-connections.
*Positions of welding: F = flat, H = horizontal, V = vertical. OH =overhead.
**See Figures 14, 15. and 16.
exceed 1/64 in. (0.4 mm). Weld reinforcement shall not Table 15
exceed values given in Table 15.
Acceptable Reinforcement on Groove
7.12.6.4 The root of the weld shall be inspected. Welds in Pipe and Tubing
There must be no evidence of cracks, incomplete fusion, Thickness
Wall
Maximum
Reinforcement
or inadequate jointpenetration. A concave root surface is
permitted within the limits shown in 7.12.6.5, provided in. mm in. mm
the total weld thickness is equal to or greater than that of 318 or less 9.5 3132 2
the base metal. Over 318 to 314 10-19 118 3
Over 314 19 3/16 5
7.12.6.5 The root surface concavity shall be
1/16 in. (1.6 mm) or less, and the melt-through shall be
118 in. (3 mm) or less.
results of both retest specimens must meet the test re-
7.12.7 Visual Inspection-Plate. For acceptable quirements. For material over 1.5 in. (38 mm) thick, fail-
qualification, the welded test plate shall conform to the ure of a specimen shall require testing of all specimens of
requirements for visual inspection in Section 8, Weld the same type from two additional locationsin the test
Quality and Inspection. material.
7.13 Records. Records of the test results shall be kept by
the manufacturer or contractor, and shall be available to
those authorized to examine them. Part C
7.14 Retests. If any one tested specimen fails tomeet the
Welder Qualification
test requirements, two retests of that particular type of
test specimen may be performed with specimens cut 7.15 General. The qualification tests described are spe-
from the same procedure qualification test material. The cially devised to determine a welder’s ability to produce
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
sound welds. These tests arenot intended to be used as a 7.16.7 A change in the direction of welding shall
guide for welding during actual construction. Welding require requalification when the plate is in the vertical
during manufacturing shallbe performed in accordance position, or the pipe or tubing isin the SG or 6G position.
with the requirements of the welding procedure
specification. 7.16.8 The omission of backing material in complete
joint penetration welds that are welded from one side
7.16 Limitations. For thequalification of welders, the shall require requalification.
following rulesshall apply:
7.17 Qualification Tests Required
7.16.1 Qualification established with any oneof the 7.17.1The welder qualification tests for manual and
steels permitted by this specification shall be considered semiautomatic welding of plate shall be as follows:
as qualification to weld or tack weld any of the other
(1) Groove weld qualification test for plate of unlim-
steels.
ited thickness
7.16.2 A welder shall be qualified for each process (2) Groove weld qualificationtest for plate of limited
used. thickness
(3) Fillet weld qualification test for fillet welds only,
7.16.3 A welder qualified for SMAW with an elec- Option 1 or 2 (see 7.22)
trode identified in Table 16 shall be considered qualified
to weld, or tack weld, with any other electrode in the 7.17.2 The pipe or tubing qualificationtests for and
same group designation, andwith any electrode listed in semiautomatic welding shall be as follows:
a numerically lower group designation. (1) Groove weld qualification test for butt joints in
pipe or tubing
7.16.4 A welder qualified with an approved electrode- (2) Groove weld qualification test for T-, Y-,or K-
shielding medium combination shall be considered quali- connections in pipe or tubing
fied to weld or tack weld with any other approved elec-
trode-shielding medium combination for the process 7.17.3 A welder who makes a successful procedure
used in the qualification test. qualification test of a complete joint penetration groove
weld in flat plate is qualified to weld production plate
7.16.5 A change in the position of welding to one for with the welding process and in the position used in the
which the welder is not qualified to weld shall require test. The thicknessrange qualified for and the number of
qualification in that position. test specimens required shall be as specified in Table
18(1). The welder isalso qualified to make filletwelds in
7.16.6 A change from one diameter-thickness group- plate and pipe, as shown in Table 17.
ing of pipe shown in Table 18 to another grouping shall
require requalification. 7.17.4 The welder who makes a successful procedure
qualification test of a complete joint penetration groove
weld in pipe without a backing stripis qualified to weld
pipe and tubing with the process andin the position used
in the test. The diameter and wall thickness ranges
Table 16 qualified for and the number of test specimens required
SMAW Electrode Groups shall be as specified in Table 18(2).
Group Designation AWS Electrode

Classification* 7.18 Groove Weld Plate Qualifwation Test for Plate of
Unlimited Thickness. The joint detail shall be as fol-
F4 EXXIS, EXXl6, EXXI8, EXXIS-X, lows: 1 in. (25 mm) plate, single-V-groove,45 degree in-
EXX 16-X, EXX 18-X, EXX
18M cluded angle, 1/4 in. (6 mm) root opening with backing
EXX 1O, EXX 1I , EXX 10-X,EXX 11-X (see Figure 20A). For horizontal position qualification,
F3
the joint detail may, at the contractor’s option, be a sin-
F2 13, EXX 14, EXX 13-X,
EXX 12, EXX gle-bevel-groove, 45 degree groove angle,1/4 in. (6 mm)
EXX19 root opening with backing (see Figure 20B). Backing
FI EXX20. EXX24, EXX27, EXX28, must be at least 3/8 in.(9.5 mm) x 3 in. (76 mm) if radio-
EXX2O-X, EXX27-X graphic testing is used without prior removal of backing.
~ ~~
Backing must be at least 3/8 in. x 2 in. (9.5 mm x

*The letters “ X X used in the classification designationsin this 5 1 mm) for mechanical testingor for radiographic test-
table represent the various strength levels in ksi (60.70,80,90, ing after the backing is removed. The minimumlength of
100, 1 IO, and 120)of deposited weld metal. weld groove shall be 5 in. (1 27 mm).
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
81
Table 17
Welder Qualification-Type and Position Limitations
'Qpe of Weld and Position of Welding Qualified*
Qualification
Plate or Pipe
tions Weld Fillet
1G Plate-groove F F, H F 2) (Note EH
(Note 1) 2G F, H F, H F, H (Note 2) EH
3G F, H, V F, H, V F. H
4G F, OH F, H, OH F
3G and 4G All All F. H
Plate-fillet F F
(Notes
2F13)and EH EH
3F E H, V
4F F, H, OH
3F and 4F All
Pipe-groove lG Rotated F F, H F F, H
F, 2G H F, H F, H F. H
5G F, V, OH F, V, OH F, V, OH F, V, OH
Note 6G 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4
2G and 5G Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4
6GR All All All All
Notes:
1. Not applicable for welding operator qualification [see 7.34(5)].
2. Welding operators qualified to weld pipe or tubing over 24 in. (600 mm) in diameter for the test positions indicated
3. Not applicable for fillet welds between parts having a dihedral angle of 75 degrees or less.
4. Qualifies for all but groove welds for T-, Y-. and K-connections.
*Positions of welding: F = flat, H = horizontal, V =vertical, OH = overhead
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
7.19 Groove Weld Plate Qualification Test for Plate of face and root opening without backing (see Figure 22A),
Limited Thickness. The joint detailshall be as follows: or a single-V-groove, 60 degree included angle, and suit-
3/8 in. (9.5 mm) plate, single-V-groove, 45 degree in- able root opening with backing (see Figure 22B).
cluded angle, 1/4 in. (6 mm) root opening with backing
(see Figure 21A). For horizontal position qualification, 7.21 Groove Weld Qualification Test for T-, Y-, and
the joint detailmay, at the contractor's option, be single K-Connections on Pipeor Tubing. The test joint design
bevel groove, 45 degree groove angle, 1/4 in. (6 mm) is shown in Figure 23. The joint detail shall be as
root opening with backing (see Figure 21B). Backing follows: single bevel groove, 37-1/2 degree included
must be at least 3/8 in. x 3 in. (9.5 mm x 76 mm) if radio- angle, 3/16 in. ( 5 mm) maximum root face, 1/8 in.
graphic testing is used without prior removal of the back- (3 mm) root opening with the bevel on a pipe or tube that
ing. Backing must be at least 3/8 in x 2 in. (9.5 mm x is at least 1/2 in. (13 mm) thick. The square edge pipe or
5 1 mm) for mechanical testing or for radiographic test- tube shall be at least 3/16 in. ( 5 mm) thicker than the
ing after the backing is removed. The minimum length of beveled pipe. A restriction ring shall be placed on the
weld groove shall be 5 in. (127 mm). thicker pipe within 1/2 in. (13 mm)of the joint, and shall
extend at least 6 in. (152 mm) beyond the surface of the
7.20 Groove Weld Qualification Test for Butt Joints pipe or tube (see Figure 23). Test specimens for side
in Pipe or Tubing. The jointdetail shall be that shown in bends shall be taken as indicated in Figure 26 and ma-
a qualified welding procedure specification for a single- chined as standard specimens with parallel sides.
welded pipe butt joint. Alternatively, the joint may be
prepared in job-sized pipe with a single V-groove, 60 7.22 Fillet Weld Qualification Test. For fillet weld
degree included angle, 1/8 in. (3 mm) maximum root qualification only, the welder shall weld a test plate
82
Table 18
Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified-
Welder and Welding Operator Qualification
1. Tests on Plate
Number of Specimens
Thickness of Bend Tests*
Test Plate(T) visual Plate Thickness
Type of Weld As Welded, in. Inspection Root Face
Side T-Joint Break Macroetch test Qualified, in.
Groove** 318 Yes 1 1 - - - 314 mmC
Groove 318 c T c 1 Yes - - 2 - - T/2-2Tc*d
Groove 1 or over Yes - - 2 - - UnlimitedC
Fillet option No. la 1I2 Yes - - - 1 1 Unlimited
Fillet option No. 2b 318 Yes - 2 - - - Unlimited
Notes:
a. See Figure 24.
b. See Figure 25.
c. Also qualifies for welding fillet weldson material of unlimited thickness.
d. T max for welding operator qualification.
*Radiographic examinationof the welder or welding operator test platemay be made in lieu of the bend test (see 7.3.2).
**Not applicable for welding operator qualification.
2. Tests on Pipe or Tubing

~~~
Number of Specimens
Pipe or Tube Wall
Pipe or Tubing Size, All Positions Except 5G & 6G Thickness
As Welded Positions Only SGBr6G Qualified, in.
Pipe or
5 p e of Face Side Root Face Tube
VisualSize Side Root
Weld Diam. Thickness Inspection Bend Bend Bend Bend Bend
Qualified, in. Bend Maxa Min
2 in. Sch. 80
Groove or Yes 1 1 - 2 2 - 4 or smaller O. 125 0.674
3 in. Sch. 40
in.
6Sch.
120
- - - - Larger
Groove or Yes 2 0.187 Unlimited
than4
8 in.
Sch. 80
- - - - - -,Y-, andK- -
Groove See Figure 23 Yes 4 Unlimited
'connections
Job Size Pipe
or Tubing
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Note: Radiographic examinationof the welder or welding operator test platemay be made in lieu of the bend test (see 7.3.2).
a. Also qualifies for welding fillet weldsof material of unlimited thickness.
b. Minimum pipe size qualified shallnot be less than 4 in. or IDd. whichever is greater. where d is diameter of test pipe.
(continued)
83
3. Tests on Electroslag and Electrogas Welds

Plate Thickness
Plate Thickness Tested, in.Number of Sample Welds Visual Inspection Side Bend Qualified, in.
1-1/2 max 1 Yes 2 Unlimited for 1-112
Max tested for c 1 - 1/2
Note: Radiographic examination of the welder or welding operator test plate may be made in lieu of the bend test (see 7.3.2).
according to Option 1or Option 2, depending on the con- position groovewelding and flat- and horizontal-position
tractor's choice, as follows: fillet welding of pipe, tubing,and plate.
(1) Option 1-Weld a T-test plate in accordance with 7.23.2.3 Qualification in the 5G (pipe horizontal,
Figure 24. fixed) position qualifies the welder for flat-, vertical-,
(2) Option 2-Weld a soundness test plate in accor- and overhead-position groove welding and flat-,
dance with Figure 25. vertical-, and overhead-position fillet welding of pipe,
tubing, and plate.
7.23 Position of Test Welds. The positions shall be as
7.23.2.4 Qualification in the 6G (inclined, fixed)
listed in Table 17.
position qualifies the welder for all-position grooveand
7.23.1 Groove Plate Test Welds all-position filletwelding of pipe, tubing,and plate.
7.23.1.1 Qualification in the l G (flat) position 7.23.2.5 Qualification forT-, Y-, or K-connections
qualifies the welder for flat-position groove welding of in the 6GR (inclined, fixed) position qualifiesthe welder
plate, pipe, and tubing, and flat- and horizontal-position for groove welding of T-, Y-,or K-connections, and for
fillet welding of plate, pipe,and tubing. groove and fillet welding of pipe, tubing, and plate in all
positions.
7.23.1.2 Qualification in the 2G (horizontal) posi-
tion qualifies the welder for flat-and horizontal-position 7.23.3 Fillet Weld Test
groove welding, and flat- and horizontal-position fillet 7.23.3.1 Qualification in the 1F (flat) position
welding of plate, pipe, and tubing. qualifies the welder for flat-position welding of plate,
pipe, and tubing.
7.23.1.3 Qualification in the 3G (vertical) position
qualifies the welder for flat-, horizontal-, and vertical- 7.23.3.2 Qualification in the 2F (horizontal) posi-
position groove welding, and flat-, horizontal-, and tion qualifies the welder for flat- and horizontal-position
vertical-position fillet welding of plate; and flat- and fillet welding of plate, pipe,and tubing.
horizontal-position fillet weldingof pipe and tubing.
7.23.3.3 Qualification in the 3F (vertical) position
7.23.1.4 Qualification in the 4G (overhead) posi- qualifies the welder for flat-, horizontal-, and vertical-
tion qualifies the welder for flat- and overhead-position position fillet welding of plate.
groove welding, and flat-, horizontal-, and overhead-po- 7.23.3.4 Qualification in the 4F (overhead) posi-
sition filletwelding of plate; and flat-position filletweld- tion qualifies the welder for flat-, horizontal-, and over-
ing of pipe and tubing. head-position filletwelding of plate.
7.23.2 Groove Pipe Test Welds 7.24 Base Metal. The base metal used shall comply with
7.23.2.1 Qualification in the 1G (pipe horizontal, the welding procedure specification.
rotated) position qualifies the welder for flat-position 7.25 Joint Welding Procedure
groove welding of pipe, tubing, and plate; and flat- and
horizontal-position fillet welding of pipe, tubing, and 7.25.1 The welder shall follow a joint welding proce-
plate. dure specification applicable to the joint details givenin
7.18, 7.19, 7.20, 7.21, or 7.22, whichever is applicable.
7.23.2.2 Qualification in the 2G (pipe vertical) For complete joint penetration groove welds that are
position qualifies the welder for flat- and horizontal- welded from one side without backing, the welder shall
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
84
NOTE: WHEN RADIOGRAPHYIS USED FOR TESTING,

NO TACK WELDS SHALL BE IN THE TEST AREA.
Figure 20A"Test Platefor Unlimited Thickness-Welder Qualification
NOTE: WHEN RADIOGRAPHYIS USED FOR TESTING,

NO TACK WELDS SHALL BE IN THETEST AREA.
SPECIMEN
Figure 20B-Optional Test Plate €or Unlimited Thickness-

Horizontal Position-Welder Qualification
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
85
FACE-BEND
SPECIMEN SPECIMEN
7’
NOTE: WHEN RADIOGRAPHY IS USED FOR TESTING,

NO TACK WELDS SHALL BE IN THE TEST AREA.
Figure 21A-Test Plate for Limited Thickness-All Positions-Welder Qualification
t
DIRECTION
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
OF ROLLING
I ROOT-BEND
SPECIMEN
NOTE: WHEN RADIOGRAPHY IS USEDFOR TESTING,

FACE-BEND” NO TACK WELDS SHALL BE IN THE TESTAREA.
SPECIMEN
Figure 21B-Optional Test Plate for Limited Thickness-

Horizontal Position-Welder Qualification
86
t
1f8 MAX
1f8 MAX SUITABLE
ROOT OPENING
Figure 22A"Pipe Test Butt Joint-Welder Figure 22B"Pipe Test Butt Joint-Welder
Qualification-Without Backing Qualification-With Backing
112 MAX
Figure 23-Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K- Connections on Pipe or lhbing-
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
11Y
FILLET WELD
BREAK
5/16 FILLET WELD
,\
112
WELDING NEAR CENTER
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
- \
L MACROETCH SPECIMEN 1 NOTE: PLATE THICKNESS AND
(ETCH INTERIOR FACE) DIMENSIONS ARE MINIMUM.
Figure 24-Fillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test Plate-Welder Qualification-Option 1
follow a welding procedure specification applicable to 7.26.4 The weld reinforcement need not be ground or
the joint detail shown in Figure 22A. otherwise smoothed for inspection when radiographic
testing is used in lieu of the prescribed bend tests, unless
7.25.2 Weld cleaning shall be donewith the test weld in
surface irregularities or juncture with the base metal
the same position as the welding position being qualified.
would cause objectionable weld discontinuities to be ob-
7.26 Test Specimens scured in the radiograph. If the backing is removed for
radiographic testing, the root shall be ground flush with
7.26.1 The type and number of test specimens that
the base metal (see 8.7.3).
must be tested to qualify a welder by mechanical testing
are given in Table 18. The range of thickness that can be 7.27 Method of Testing Specimens
welded in construction, which depends on the thickness
of the test plate, is also given in the table. Radiographic 7.27.1 Root-, Face-, and Side-Bend Specimens. Each
examination of the test weld may be used in lieu of specimen shall be bent in a jig having the contour shown
mechanical testing at the contractor’s option. in Figure 27A, and otherwisesubstantially in accordance
with that figure. Theplunger member may be moved with
7.26.2 Guided bend test specimens shall be prepared relation to the die member by any convenient means.
by cutting the test plate, pipe, or tubing as shownin Fig- The specimen shall be placed on the die member of
ures 20A and B, 21A and B, 25 or 26, whichever is appli- the jig with the weld at midspan. Face-bend specimens
cable, to form specimens approximately rectangularin shall be placed with the face of the weld toward the die
cross section. The specimens shall be prepared for test- member. Root-bend and fillet weld Option No. 2 sound-
ing in accordance with Figures 18A through D,which- ness specimens shall be placed with the root of the weld
ever is applicable. toward the die member. Side-bend specimens shall be
7.26.3 The fillet weld break and macroetch test speci- placed with that side showing thegreater discontinuity, if
mens shall be cut from thetest joint as shownin Figure any, toward the die member.
24. The exposed section of the macroetch test specimen The specimen shall be forced into the die until the
shall be smoothed for etching. specimen assumes a U-shape of the plunger. The weld
ROOT-BEND TEST SPECIMEN
5 MIN
- ..........-
ROOT-BEND TEST SPECIMEN
THESE EDGES MAY BE OXYGEN-CUTAND

MAY OR MAY NOT BEMACHINED.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
1- 3 MIN 3 MIN -4 /
RADIUS 1/8 MAX J
r THE PORTION BETWEEN FILLET WELDS

MAY BE WELDED IN ANY POSITION.
MAXIMUM SIZE SINGLE X 2 in. IF RADIOGRAPHY IS USED,

PASS FILLET WELD 3/8 in. THEN USE AT LEAST3/8 X 3 in. BAR.
THE BACKING SHALL BEIN INTIMATE

CONTACT WITH THE BASE METAL.
THE WELD REINFORCEMENT AND THE BACKING SHALL
BE REMOVED FLUSH WITH THE BASE METAL (SEE8.7.3).
OXYGEN CUTTING MAYBE USEDFOR THE REMOVALOF
THE MAJOR PART OF THE BACKING, PROVIDED AT LEAST
1/8 in. OF ITS THICKNESS IS LEFT TO BE REMOVED
BY MACHININGOR GRINDING.
Figure 25-Fillet Weld Root-Bend Test Plate- Welder Qualification-Option 2
SIDE-
BEND
PIPE WALL 3/8in.UNDER

AND PIPE WALL
OVER 3/8in.
SPECIMENS FOR 1G AND 2G POSITIONS
TOP OF PIPE FOR

--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
5G AND 6G POSITIONS
/"
SIDE-
BEND.
SIDE-
BEND
SIDE-BENDL
WALL
PIPE 3/8in.UNDER
AND
WALL
OVER
PIPE 3/8in.
SPECIMENS FOR 5G AND 6G POSITIONS
Figure 26-Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Pipe-

-AS REQUIRED-
TAPPED HOLE TO SUIT
TESTING MACHINE r PLUNGER MEMBER
\ I-A-I
1
I
1
1-118 [
MaterialSpecified
Minimum A BD C
Yield Strength, psi in. in. in. in.
50 O00 & under 314 1-112 2-3/8 1-W16
Over 50 O00 to 90 O00 1 2 2-718 1-7116
over
90 O00 &1-11/16 3-318 1-114 2-112
Note: Plunger and interior diesurfaces shall be machine-finished.
Figure 27A- Guided-Bend Test Jig
and heat-affected zones shall be centered and completely the weld is in tension. The load shall be steadily
within the bent portion of the specimen aftertesting. increased or repeated until the specimen fractures or
When using a wraparound jig (see Figure 27B), the bends flat upon itself.
specimen shall be firmly clamped on one endso that the
specimen does not slide during the bending operation. 7.27.3 Macroetch Test (Fillet Option No. 1). The
The weld and heat-affected zones must be completely test specimens shall be suitably smoothed formacroetch
within the bent portion of the specimen after testing. The examination. A suitable solution shall be used for
test specimen shall be removed from the jig after the etching to give a clear definition
of the weld.
outer roll has been moved180 degrees from the starting
7.27.4 Radiographic Test. The radiographic proce-
point.
dure and technique shall be in accordance with the re-
7.27.2 Fillet Weld Break Test (Option No. 1). The quirements of Section8, Weld Quality and Inspection.
entire length of the fillet weld shall
be examined visually, Only the center50 percent of the testplate length shall be
and then a 6 in. (152 mm) long specimen shall be cut subject to examination. Welded test pipeor tubing 4 in.
from the sampleand loaded in such a way that the mot of (100 mm) in diameter or larger shall be examined for a
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
91
ROLLER ANY
Minimum Specified Material A B

in. psi
Yield Strength, in.
50 O00 & under 1-112 W4
Over 50 O00 to 90 O00 2 1
90 O00 & over 2-112 1-1/4
Figure 27B-Alternative Wraparound Guided-Bend Test Jig
minimum of one-half of the weld perimeter selected to of the joint, and exhibit no inclusion or porosity larger
include a sample of all positions welded. Welded test than 3/32 in. (2.4 mm) in the greatest dimension to pass
pipe or tubing less than 4 in. in diameter shall require the test. The sum of the greatest dimensions of all inclu-
100 percent radiography. sions and porosity at the fractured surface must not
exceed 318 in. (9.5 mm) in the 6 in. (152 mm) long
specimen.
7.28.1 Root-, Face-, and Side-Bend Tests. The con-
vex surface of the bent specimen shall be examined visu- 7.28.3 Macroetch Test.The specimen shall be exam-
ally for discontinuities. Any bent specimen in which a ined for discontinuities. If discontinuities prohibited by
crack or other open discontinuity exceeding 1/8 in. (3 Section 8, Weld Quality and Inspection, are found, the
mm) in any direction is present shall be considered as test shall be considered as failed. The weld must show
having failed. Cracks occurring on the corners of the fusion to the root, but not necessarily beyond, and both
specimen may be 1/4 in. maximum length, provided legs must be equal to within 1/8 in. (3 mm). Convexity
there is no evidence of slag inclusions or other fusion- must not exceed the limits specified in 8.7. e.g., 1/16 in.
type discontinuities. (1.6 mm) fora 5/16 in. (8 mm) test weld.
7.28.2 Fillet Weld Break Test 7.28.4 Radiographic Test.To qualify, the weld, asre-
vealed by the radiograph, must conform to the require-
7.28.2.1 To pass visual examination, the fillet weld ments of Section 8.
shall present a reasonably uniform appearance and must
be free of overlap, cracks, and excessiveundercut. There 7.28.5 Visual Inspection of Pipe and Tubing. See
must be no porosity visible on the surface of the weld. 7.12.6.
7.28.2.2 The fillet weld specimen passes the test if 7.28.6 Visual Inspection of Plate. For acceptable
1 it bends
flat upon itself. If the
fillet
weld
fractures,
the qualification, the welded test plates shall conform to the
fractured surface must show complete fusion to the root requirements for visual inspection in Section 8.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
92
~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~~
Minimum Specified Material A B C

in. in. psi
Yield Strength, in.
50 O00 8 under 1-1/2 34 2-318
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Over 50 O00 to 90 O D 0 2 1 2-718
90 O 0 0 8 over 2- 112 1-114 3-318
Figure 27C -Alternative Roller-Equipped Guided-Bend Test

Jig
for Bottom Ejectionof Test Specimen
7.29 Retests.If one or more test welds made by a welder 7.32 Workmanship Qualification
fails to meet the requirements, aretest may be allowed
under the following conditions: 7.32.1 Scope. The tests described herein are a second
(1) An immediate retest may be madeconsisting of two method of welder qualification for welders performing
welds of each type on which the welder failed. Theretest operations on secondary stressed components and non-
specimens must meet all the specified requirements. critical weldments. Workmanship samples, as shownin
Figures 28 (A) and (B), or a sample similar to the pro-
(2) A retest may be made, provided there is evidence
duction welds shall be made.
that the welder has had further training or practice. In
this case, one completeretest shall be made. 7.32.2 Welder Qualification. Qualification tests are
7.30 Period of Effectiveness. The welder’s qualifica- used to determine a welder’s ability to produce sound,
tion, as specified, shall remain in effect indefinitely unacceptable welds when welding to the requirements of a
less (1) the welder is not engaged in a given process of qualified procedure specification using a manually-
welding for which the welder is qualified for a period directed welding process. The type and number of sam-
exceeding 6 months or (2) there is some specific reason ples to be made shall be determinedby the manufacturer
to question the welder’s ability. In case ( l ) , the to represent the type of work the welder will be doing.
requalification test need be made only in the 3/8 in. (9.5 The test shall be witnessed, evaluated, and recordedby
mm) thickness. personnel authorized by the manufacturer to do so, using
visual inspection and appropriate sectioning and etching
7.31 Records. Records of the test results shall be kept by of each sample. The welds shall meet the requirements of
the manufacturer or contractor and shallbe available to sections 5 , Workmanship and 8, Weld Quality and
those authorized to examine them. Inspection.
93
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
0.75 in.
, (9.5 mm)
SINGLE-
.., ..:.
0.5 in.
(13 mm)
(A) FILLET WELD SIZEIS LIMITED BY THE WELDING PROCESS

AND POSITION OF THE TEST
0.75in.
(9.5 mm)
(B) FILLET WELD SIZE SHOULD BE A MINIMUM OF0.75 in. (19 mm).
NUMBER OF PASSES REQUIRED IS DETERMINED BY THE WELDING PROCESS,
POSITION OF TEST, AND PROCEDURE.
Figure 28-Examples of Workmanship Samples
~
S T D = A W S D L 4 - L - E N G L L997 m 07842b50509b3003b m
94
7.32.3 Production Qualification.After successful Part D

completion of one or more workmanship samples, the
capability of the welder to satisfactorily perform produc-
Welder Operator Qualification
tion welding will be determined after a tryoutat the job
station. Qualification shall be achieved when the welder 7.33 General. The qualification tests describedin this
produces a typical production part that meets the quality section are specially devised to determine a welding
requirements of this specification, as witnessed and operator’s ability to produce soundwelds. The tests are
recorded by personnel authorized by the manufacturer to not intended to be used as a guide for welding during
do so. actual construction. The latter shall be performed in ac-
cordance with the requirementsof the procedure specifi-
7.32.4 Sample Examination. Methods of examining cation. For an alternate method of qualification, see7.32.
samples shall be visual, sectioning and etching, and
physical measurement. 7.34 Limitations. For the qualification of a welding op-
erator, the following rules shall apply:
7.32.4.1 Visual Examination. To pass the visual (1) Qualification established with any one of the
examination, the weld must meet the requirements of steels permitted by this specification shall be considered
Section 5 , Workmanship and Section 8, Weld Quality as qualification toweld any of the other steels.
and Inspection. (2) A welding operator qualified with an approved
electrode-shielding medium combination shall be
7.32.4.2 Macroetch Examination. The specimen considered qualified to weld with any other approved
cross section shall be smoothed, etched, and examined electrode-shielding medium combinationfor the process
for discontinuities. The sample mustmeet the applicable used in the qualification test.
requirements in other sections of this specification. The
(3) A welding operator qualifiedto weld with multiple
weld must show complete fusion to the root, but not electrodes or welding heads shall be qualified to weld
necessarily beyond. Convexity and concavity of the weld with a single electrode, but not vice versa. This does not
must not exceed the limits specified in Sections 5 and 8. apply for electrogas and electroslag welding.
7.32.4.3 Physical Measurement Examination. (4) An electroslag or electrogas welding operator
Welds shall be measured to ascertain that they meet the qualified with an approved electrode-shielding medium
combination shall be considered qualified to weldwith
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
size tolerances specifiedin Sections 5 and 8.
any other approved electrode-shielding medium combi-
7.32.5 Retests. In case one or moretest welds fail to nation for the process used in the qualification test.
meet the requirements of 7.32.4, the welder may be ( 5 ) A change in the position in which welding is done
retested under the following conditions: shall require qualification i n the new position (see
(1) An immediate retest may be made that shall con- 7.35.3).
sist of two test welds of each type that failed. Both test 7.35 Qualification Tests Required
specimens must meet all the requirements specified for
such welds. 7.35.1 The welding operator qualification test, for
(2) Aretest may be made, provided thereis evidence other than electroslag or electrogas welding,shall have
that the welder has had further training or practice. In the following joint detail: 1 in. (25 mm) plate, single-
this case, one completeretest shall be made. V-groove, 20 degree groove angle,5/8 in. (1 6 mm) root
opening with backing (see Figure 29). Backing mustbe
7.32.6 Period of Effectiveness. Welder qualification at least 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) x 3 in. (76 mm) if radiographic
verified by workmanship samples shallremain in effect testing is used without prior removal of backing. It must
indefinitely unless (1) the welder doesnot use a welding be at least 3/8 in. x 2 in. (9.5 mm x 5 1 mm) for mechani-
process for which the welder is qualified for a period cal and ultrasonic testing and for radiographic testing
exceeding six months or (2) there is some specificreason after the backing is removed. Minimum length of the
to question the welder’s ability. In case (I), the requalifi- welding groove shall be 15 in. (381 mm). This test will
cation test need be made only in 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) thick qualify the welding operator for groove and fillet weld-
material. ing in materials of unlimited thickness if the test results
are satisfactory.
7.32.7 Records. Records of the test results shall be
kept by the manufacturer and shall be available to those 7.35.2 An electroslag or electrogas welding operator
authorized to examine them (see suggested sample form shall be tested by welding a jointin material of the maxi-
in Annex A). mum thickness to be used in construction, except that the
95
SIDE-BEND
DIRECTION OF
ROLLING
./2 SPEC"EN
Notes:
1, When radiography is used for testing, no tack welds shall be in test area.
2. The joint configurationof a qualified groove weld procedure may be used in lieu of the
groove configuration shown here.
Figure 29-Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness-Welding Operator Qualification
material thickness for the test weld need not exceed (1) Option 1-Weld a T-shaped test plate in accor-
1-1/2 in. (38 mm) (see Figure 30). If a 1-112 in. (38 mm) dance with Figure 3 1.
thick test weld is made, tests need not be made for thin- (2) Option 2-Weld a soundness test plate in accor-
ner sections. This test shall qualify the welding operator dance with Figure 32.
for groove welds in material of unlimited thickness if the
7.36 Base Metal. The base metal used shall comply with
test results are satisfactory.
Section 2, Base Metals, or the welding procedure specifi-
7.35.3 The welding operator who makes a complete cation used for qualification.
joint penetration groove weld procedure qualification 7.37 Joint Welding Procedure
test that meets the test requirements is qualified for that
process and test position for plate of the same thickness 7.37.1The welding operator shall follow the joint
as the welded test plate. If the test plate is 1-1/2 in. welding procedure specified by the welding procedure
(38 mm) or over in thickness and welded by electroslag specification.
or electrogas welding, or 1 in. (25 mm) or over and 7.37.2 Weld cleaning shall be done with the test weld
welded by any other processes, the welding operator will in the same position as the welding position being
be qualified for all thicknesses with the welding process qualified.
used if the test results are satisfactory.
A welding operator qualified to weld pipe shall also 7.38 Test Specimens
be qualified to weld plate, but not vice versa, except that 7.38.1 Guided bend test specimens for mechanical
qualification on plate in the l C (flat) or 2G (horizontal) testing shall be prepared by cutting the test plate as
position shall qualify the operator for welding pipe or shown in Figures 29, 30, or 32, whichever is applicable,
tubing over 24 in. (610 mm) diameter in the position to form specimens approximately rectangular in cross
qualified. See Table 17 (Note 2) for additional pipe posi- section. The specimens shall be prepared for testing in
tion qualifications. conformance to Figures 18A through D, as applicable.
7.35.4 For fillet weld qualification only, the welding 7.38.2 At the manufacturer's option, radiographic
operator shall weld a test plate according to Option 1 or testing of the weld may be performed in lieu of the
Option 2 , depending on the contractor's choice, as guided bend test. In that event, the weld reinforcement
follows: need not be ground or otherwise smoothed for inspec-
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Notes:
1. Root opening “R” established by procedure specification.
2. T = maximum to be welded in construction butneed not exceed 1-1/2 in.
*Extensions need not be used if jointis of sufficient length to provide 17 in. of
sound weld.
Figure 30-Butt Joint for Electroslag and Electrogas-

Welding Operator Qualification
tion. unless surface irregularities or juncture with the the appropriate dimensions for the base metal strength.
base metal would cause objectionable weld discontinui- Any convenient meansmay be used to move the plunger
ties to be obscured during the radiographic inspection.If member with relation to the die member. The specimen
the backing is removed for radiographic testing, the root shall be placed on the die member of the jig with the
shall be ground flush with the basemetal (see 8.7.3). weld at midspan. Side-bend specimens shall be placed
with the side having the larger discontinuities, if any,
7383 The fillet weld break and macroetch test speci- directed toward the die member. Root-bend (fillet weld
mens shall be cut from the test joint as shownin Figure
soundness) specimens shall be placed with the mot of the
3 1. The exposed sectionof the macroetch test specimen
weld directed toward the die member.
shall be finished smooth for etching.
739 Method of Testing Specimens 7392 Radiographic procedure andtechnique shall
be in accordance with the requirements of Section 8.
7.39.1 Root- or Side-Bend Specimens. Each speci- Weld Quality and Inspection. Onlythe center 50 percent
in Figure 27A having
men shall be bent in a jig as shown of the test weld shall be subject totesting.
/- DlSCARD
- i l CUT LINE
75/16 FILLET WELD

--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
L MACROETCHSPECIMEN 1
(ETCH INTERIOR FACE)
Notes:
1. L = 15 min.
2. Plate thickness and dimensions areminimum.
Figure 31-Fillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test Plate-

Option 1-Welding Operator Qualification
7.39.3 Fillet Weld Break Test. The entire length specimen may be 1/4 in. maximum length, provided
of the fillet weld shall be examined visually, and then a there is no evidence of slag inclusions or other fusion-
6 in. (152 mm) long specimen shall be cut from the test type discontinuities.
sample andloaded in such away that the root of the weld
is in tension. The load shall be steadily increased or 7.40.2 Welds examined by radiographic examination
repeated until the specimen fractures or bends flat upon shall conform to the requirements of Section 8, Weld
itself. Quality and Inspection.
7.39.4 Macroetch Test. The test specimens shall 7.40.3 Fillet Weld Break Test
be prepared with a finish suitable for macroetch exami-
nation. A suitable solution shall be used to give a clear 7.40.3.1 To pass the visual examination, the fillet
weld must present a reasonably uniform appearance and
definition of the weld area.
must be free of overlap, cracks, and excessive undercut.
7.40 Test Results Required There must be no porosity visible on the face of the weld.
7.40.1 Root-, Side-Bend Test. The convex surface of 7.40.3.2 The specimen passes the test if it bends
the specimen shall be examined for the appearance of flat upon itself. If the fillet weld fractures, the fractured
I
cracks or other open discontinuities. Any bent specimen surface must show complete fusion to the root of the
containing a crack or other open discontinuity exceeding joint, and must exhibit no inclusion or porosity larger
1/8 in. (3 mm), measured in any direction, shall be con- than 3/32 in. (2.4 mm) in the greatest dimension. The
sidered as failed. Cracks occurring on the corners of the sum of the greatest dimensions of all inclusions and
98
_..........
"
ROOT-BEND SPECIMEN
15 MIN
1
ROOT-BEND SPECIMEN L1
7 1-1M
THESE EDGES MAY BE OXYGEN-CUT AND

MAY OR MAY NOT BE MACHINED.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
RADIUS 118 MAX
r THE PORTION BETWEEN FILLET WELDS

MAY BE WELDED IN ANY POSITION.
MAXIMUM SIZE SINGLE AT LEAST W8 X 2 in. IF RADIOGRAPHY IS USED,

PASS FILLET WELDW8 in. THEN USE AT LEAST W8 X 3 in. BAR.
THE BACKING SHALL BE IN INTIMATE

CONTACT WITH THE BASE METAL.
THE WELD REINFORCEMENT AND THE BACKING SHALL
BE REMOVED FLUSH WITH THE BASE METAL. OXYGEN
CUTTING MAY BE USED FOR THE REMOVALOF THE
MAJOR PART OF THE BACKING, PROVIDED AT LEAST
118 in. OF ITS THICKNESSIS LEFT TO BE REMOVED
BY MACHINING OR GRINDING.
Figure 32-Fillet Weld Root-Bend Test Plate-Option 2-

Welding Operator Qualification
99
porosity must not exceed 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) in the 6 in. 7.45.1 Qualification established with any one of the
(152 mm) long specimen. steels permitted by this specification shall qualify the
tack welder totack weld any of the other steels.
7.40.4 Macroetch Test. The test specimen shall be
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
examined for discontinuities. If any discontinuities pro- 7.45.2 Qualification of a tack welder for SMAW with
hibited by 8.6 are found on the surface, the specimen an electrode identified in Table 16 shall qualify the tack
shall be considered to have failed. The weld must show welder to tack weld with any other electrode in the same
complete fusion to the root, but not necessarily beyond, group designation and with any electrode listed in a nu-
and both legs must be equal within 1/8 in. (3 mm). Con- merically lower group designation.
vexity must not exceed the limits specifiedin 8.7.
7.45.3 Qualification of a tack welder with an ap-
7.40.5 Visual Inspection. For acceptable qualifica- proved electrode-shielding medium combination shall
tion, the welded test plate, when inspected visually, shall qualify the tack welder to tack weld with any other ap-
conform to the requirements for visual inspection in Sec- proved electrode-shielding medium combination for the
tion 8, Weld Quality and Inspection. process used in the qualification test.
7.41 Retests. If one or more test welds made by a weld- 7.45.4 A tack welder shall be qualified for each pro-
ing operator fail to meet the requirements, a retest may cess used.
be allowed under the following conditions:
(1) An immediate retest may be made consisting of 7.45.5 A change in the position in which tack welding
two test welds of each type on which the welding opera- is done, as defined in 7.8, shall require qualification in
tor failed. The retest specimens shall meet all the require- the new position.
ments specified for such welds.
7.46 Qualification Tests Required.A tack welder shall
(2) A retest may be made, provided there is evidence
be qualified by making one test specimen in each posi-
that the welding operator has had further training orprac-
tion in which he or she will tack weld on the job.
tice. In this case, one complete retest shall be made.
7.42 Period of Effectiveness. The welding operator’s 7.47 Base Metal. The base metal used shall comply with
qualification specified in this section shall remain in ef- the welding procedure specification.
fect indefinitely unless (1) the welding operator is not 7.48 Test Specimen. The tack welder shall make a tack
engaged in a given process of welding for which the op- weld of 114 in. (6 mm) maximum size and approximately
erator is qualified for aperiod exceeding 6 months,or (2) 2 in. (51 mm) long on a fillet weld break specimen,
there is some specific reason to question thewelding op- shown in Figure 33.
erator’s ability.
7.49 Method of Testing. A force shall be applied to the
7.43 Records. Records of the test results shallbe kept by
specimen, as shown in Figure 34, until rupture occurs.
the manufacturer and shall be available to those autho-
The force may be applied by any convenient means. The
rized to examine them (see suggested sample form in
surface of the weld prior to testing and the fracture sur-
Annex A).
face shallbe examined visually for discontinuities.
Part E 7.50.1 A qualification tack weld must have a reason-

Qualification of Tack Welders ably uniform appearance and be free of overlap, cracks,
and excessive undercut. There must be no visible poros-
ity on the surface of the tack weld.
7.44 General. The qualification tests described in this
section are specifically devised to determine a tack 7.50.2 The fractured surface of the tack weld must
welder’s ability to produce sound tack welds. The quali- show complete fusion to the root, butnot necessarily be-
fication tests are not intended to be used as a guide for yond, and complete fusion to the base metal. Any inclu-
tack welding during actual construction. The latter shall sion or porosity larger than 3/32 in. (2.4 mm) in greatest
be performed in accordance with the requirements of the dimension is unacceptable.
welding procedure specification. Foran alternate method
of qualification, see7.32. 7.50.3 A tack welder who passes the filletweld break
test shall be eligible to tack weld all types of joints in
7.45 Limitations. For the qualification of a tack welder, the position and with the welding process used for
the following rulesapply: qualification.
100
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 33"Fdlet Weld Break Specimen-Tack Welder Qualification
8. Weld Quality and Inspection

8.1 General
8.1.1 Inspection personnel shall perform tests as nec-
essary priorto, during, and after assembly and
welding to
ensure that materials and workmanship meetthe require-
ments of this specification.
8.1.2 Personnel performing nondestructive examina-
tion other than visual shall be qualified in accordance
with the American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC- 1A. Only individu-
als qualified for NDT Level I, and working under the
NDT Level II, or individuals qualified for NDTLevel II,
Figure 34-Method of Fracturing may perform nondestructive examination. Certification
Specimen-Tack Welder Qualification of Level I and Level II individuals shallbe performed by
a Level III individual who has been certified by (1) The
American Society for Nondestructive Testing, or (2) has
the education, training, experience, and has successfully
7.51 Retests. In case of failure to pass the qualification
passed the written examination prescribed in SNT-
test, the tack welder may makeone retest without addi-
TC- 1A.
tional training.
8.1.3 Inspectors responsible for acceptance or rejec-
7.52 Period of Effectiveness. A tack welder who passes
tion of material and workmanship shallbe qualified. The
the qualification test shall be eligible to perform tack
basis of Inspector qualification shall be documented. If
welding indefinitely in the positions and with thepro-
the Engineer elects to specify the basis of inspector qual-
cesses used for qualification unless there
is some specific
ification, it shallbe so stated in contract documents.
reason to question the tack welder's ability. In such
The following are acceptable qualification bases:
cases, the tack welder shall be required to demonstrate
(1) Current certification as an AWS Senior Certified
the ability to make soundtack welds by again passing the
Welding Inspector (SCWI) orAWS Certified Welding
prescribed welding test.
Inspector (CWI) in conformance to the provisions of
753 Records. Records of the test results shall be kept by ANSIIAWS QC-1, Standard f o r AWS Certification of
the manufacturer or contractor and shall be available to Welding Inspectors, or
those authorized to examine them (see suggested sample (2) Current certificationby the CanadianWelding Bu-
form in Annex A). reau (CWB) to the requirements of the Canadian Stan-
dard Association (CSA) Standard W178.2, Certification 8.5 Inspection of Work and Records
of Welding Inspectors, or
8.5.1 The purchaser’s representative shall make cer-
(3) An Engineer or technician who, by training or ex- tain that the size, length, and location of welds conform
perience, or both, in metals fabrication, inspection and to the requirements of this specification and to the de-
testing, is competentto perform inspectionof the work. tailed drawings,and that no specified welds are omitted.
8.2 Purchaser’s Representative 8.5.2 The purchaser’s representative shall make cer-
tain that only those welding procedures that meet the
8.2.1 A representative designated by the purchaser,
provisions of this specification are employed.
when required by the contract, shall verify that all fabri-
cation by welding is performed in conformance to there- 8.5.3 The purchaser’s representative may, at suitable
quirements of this specification. At their discretion, intervals, observe the technique and performance of any
owners, or their representatives, may waive verification welder, welding operator, or tack welder to make certain
of welding and fabrication inspection. that the applicable workmanship requirements of
Section 5, Workmanship, are being met.
8.2.2 The representative shall be furnished with or
have access to a complete set of detailed drawings show- 8.5.4 The purchaser’s representative may examine the
ing the size, length, type, and location of all welds that work to make certain that it meets the requirements of
are to be made. the workmanship standards of this specification. Size
and contour of the welds shallbe measured with suitable
8.2.3 The representative shall be notified in advance gauges. Visual inspection for cracks in welds and base
of the start of any welding operations, when required by metal and for other defects should be aided by strong
the contract. light or other devices, such as magnifiers, where they
may be helpful.
8.2.4 The representative shall not delay the normal
operating scheduleof the manufacturer if the representa- 8.5.5 The purchaser’s representative should identify
tive cannot be on site after proper notification, unless all parts or jointsthat have been inspected and accepted
otherwise agreed toin the contract. with a distinguishing mark.
8.2.5 The representative shall have the optionof per- 8.6 Visual Examination. All welds shall be visually ex-
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
forming all, or any part of, the functions set forthin 8.3, amined. Examination shall be performed after removal
8.4, and 8.5. of foreign debris, including slag.A weld shall be accept-
able by visual examination if it meets the specified size
8.2.6 If agreed to in the contract, the representative on the drawings (see Section 5 , Workmanship), and the
may keep records of all welder and welding operator following conditions aremet:
qualifications, all procedure qualifications, other tests (1) The weld has no cracks.
that are made, and other information that may be re- (2) Complete fusion exists between adjacent layers of
quired for the execution of duties. Otherwise, this in- weld metal and between weld metal and base metal.
formation shall be made available for review at the (3) All craters are filledto the full cross sectionof the
manufacturer’s facility. weld.
(4) Weld profiles are in accordance with 8.7.
8.3 Inspection of Welding Procedure Qualifications.
The purchaser’s representative may witness or review (5) Permissible frequency and sizeof piping porosity
the recordsof welding and testing of any procedure qual-
in fillet welds shallbe limited as follows:
ifications that are required in this specification. (a) For primary welds, no more than 1 pore in each
4 in. (102 mm) of length, and no larger in diameter than
8.4 Inspection of Welder, Tack Welder, and Welding 3/32 in. (2.4 mm).
Operator Qualifications. The purchaser’s representa- (b) For secondary welds, the sumof the diameters
tive shall only permit welding tobe performed by weld- of piping porosity shall not exceed 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) in
ers, tack welders, and welding operators who are any linear inch of weld, and shall not exceed 3/4 in.
qualified in advance in accordance with the requirements (19 mm) in any 12 in. (305 mm) length of weld.
of this specification. If retesting or qualification is re- ( 6 )The actual size of a portion of continuous fillet
quired, the purchasing representative may witness the weld, 318 in. (9.5 mm) or larger, can be under the nomi-
welding and testing of the qualification test for each nal required fillet weld size by 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) without
welder, tack welder, or welding operator. Otherwise, the correction, provided that the undersize portion does not
purchasing representativemay review the records of past exceed 10 percent of the weld length. On web-to-flange
qualification and testing. fillet welds on girders, no undersize weld is permitted at
102
the end of the joint in a length equal to twice thewidth of (305 mm) of weld are acceptable without measurement
the flange. undercut of the depth.
(7)Primary groove welds musthave no piping poros-
8.7.5 Welds shall be free from overlap.
ity. Secondary groove welds shall meet the porosityre-
quirements for fillet welds in 8.6(5)(a). 8.7.6 Fillet welds may not deviate from designated
(8) Visual inspection of welds in all steels may begin size by more than the tolerances given in 8.6(6). The
immediately after the completed welds have cooled to convexity shall meet the tolerances givenin 8.7.1. If the
ambient temperature. Acceptance criteria for ASTM deviation exceeds these tolerances,
the weld must be cor-
A514, A517, and A709 grades 100 and lOOW steels shall rected as noted in Section 10, Repair and Correction of
be basedonvisualinspectionperformednotlessthanDefects.
48 hours after completionof the weld.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
8.8 Nondestructive Examination
8.7 Welding Profiles
8.8.1 Joint Class I and II weld joints shall require ei-
8.7.1 The facesof fillet weldsmay be slightly convex, ther radiographic or ultrasonic examination in addition to
flat, or slightly concave, as shown in Figures 35(A), (B), magnetic particle examination. Nondestructive examina-
and (C), but with none of the unacceptable profiles tion (other than visual inspection) of weld joints other
shown in (D). Except at outside corner joints, the con- than Joint Class I or II, when it is to be required as apart
vexity C must not exceed the sum of 0.1s + 0.03 in. of the contract, shall be announced in the information
(1 mm), where S is the actual size of the fillet weld in furnished to bidders. The information provided should
inches (millimeters). See Figure 35(B) and (C). designate the inspection process to be employed, the
welds to be examined, and the extentof examination of
8.71 Groove welds shall be madewith slight Or mini- each weld. such nondestructive examination shall be
mum reinforcement$ exceptas may be Otherwise pro- conducted in conformance to the requirements of this
vided. In case of butt and comer joints, the reinforcement specification, or as modified by mutual agreement be-
height. R, must not exceed 118 in. (3 mm) for metal tween the manufacturerand purchaser.
thickness of 2 in. (51 mm) and under, and 3/16 in.
(5 mm) for metal thicknesses over 2 in.(5 1 mm). It must 8.8.2 Welds that do not meet the nondestructive ex-
have gradual transitionto the planeof the basemetal sur- amination requirementsof this specification shall bere-
face, as shown in Figure 35(E). Groove welds must be paired by the methods permitted by Section 10, Repair
free of the discontinuities shown for butt joints in and Correction of Defects.
Figure 35(F).
8.8.3 Nondestructive examinationin this specification
8.7.3 Where the surfaceof butt joints are required to is only intended toapply to primary welds, unless other-
be flush, the thicknessof the thinner basemetal or weld wise specifically agreed to in the contract between the
metal shall not be reduced by more than 1/32 in. manufacturer and the purchaser.
(0.8 mm), or 7 percent of the thickness, whichever is
smaller, and weld reinforcement shallnot exceed 1/32 in. 8.8.4 A weld that is to be subjected to nondestructive
(0.8 mm). However, all reinforcement must be removed examination neednot be ground or otherwise smoothed,
where the weld forms partof a fayingor contact surface. provided surface irregularitiesor juncture with the base
Any reinforcement must blend smoothly into the plate metal do not obscure objectionable weld discontinuities
surfaces with transition areas free from undercut. Chip- during examination.
ping may be used, provided it is followed by grinding. 8.9 Radiographic Examination of Welds
Where surface finishing is required, the roughness value
shall not exceed 250x 10-6 in. (6 x lo4 m). Surfaces fin- 8.9.1 The procedures and standards set forth in this
ishedtovaluesofover125 x in. (3 x lod6m) section are togovern radiographic examinationof welds
through 250 x I o d in. shall be finished parallel to the di- when such testing is required by stipulation of 8.8. These
rection of primary stress. Surfaces finished to 125 x lod procedures are restricted to inspectionof groove welds
in. or less may be finished in any direction. (See with complete joint penetration.
ANSUASME B46.1, Surface Texture for measurement
method.) 8.9.2 Variations in testing procedure, equipment, and
acceptance standards from those given in this section
8.7.4 Undercut depth shall not exceed 1/32 in. may be used upon agreement with the purchaser. Such
(0.8 mm) or 7 percent of the basemetal thickness, except variations include the radiographic examinationof fillet
that Joint Class IV, V, and VI weldswith a total undercut welds, T-welds, or corner welds; changes in source-to-
of less than 1/2 in. (13 mm)in length in any linear 12 in. film distance; unusual geometries; unusual penetrameter
103
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(A)
DESIRABLE FILLET WELD PROFILES (C) ACCEPTABLE FILLET WELD PROFILES

FOR LEG SIZE TOLERANCES, SEE8.6(6). C = CONVEXITY, SEE 8.7.1.
INSUFFICIENT
EXCESSIVE
EXCESSIVE
OVERLAP
INSUFFICIENT
INCOMPLETE
G UNDERCUT
CONVEXITY THROAT
(D) UNACCEPTABLE FILLET WELDPROFILES
METAL THICKNESS WELD

SMOOTH WASH REINFORCEMENT
UNDERCUT SHALL NOT t (in.) R (in.)
EXCEED 1132 in. OR
A MAX OF 0.07t. 2 OR LESS 1I8
OVER
2 3/16
SEE 8.7
(E) ACCEPTABLE BUlT JOINT WELD PROFILE
EXCESSIVE UNDERFILL EXCESSIVE OVERLAP

CONVEXITY SEE 8.7.2 UNDERCUT SEE 8.7.5
SEE 8.7 SEE 8.7.3AND 8.7.4
(F) UNACCEPTABLE GROOVE WELD PROFILES INBUlT JOINTS
Figure 35-Acceptable and Unacceptable Weld Profiles
104
application, film type,or densities; and film exposureor

equipment shall provide sufficient sensitivity to clearly
development variations. delineate the required penetrameters and the essential
holes as describedin 8.10.4 andTable 19. Identifying let-
8.9.3 Information furnished to the bidders shall clearly
ters and numbers shall show clearlyin the radiograph.
identify the extent of radiographic testing required.
Note: Alternative image quality indicators may be used
8.9.4 Completetesting,whenspecified,requiresthat when approved bythe Engineel:
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
the entire lengthof weld in each designated joint shall be

tested. an 8.10.3
haveRadiographs
shall H & D densityt3of
2.0 minimum and4.0 maximum. In addition, the density
8'9'5 'pot testing, when 'Pecified, requires that the in the area of interest shall not vary more than minus
number Of 'pots to be radiographed in a stated length Of 15 percent and plus 30 percent from the density through
weld in each designated category of weld joint shall be the penetrameter,
included in information furnished to bidders. Each spot
radiograph shall show at least 4 in. (102 mm) of wild 8.10.4 One penetrameter, centered on the film, shall
length. If a spot radiograph shows discontinuities that re- be used for film 10 in. (254 mm) or less in length. Two
quire repair, as defined in 8.11, two adjacent spots shall penetrameters, one centered and one at the end of the
be tested. If discontinuities requiring repair are detected film, shall be used for radiographs with a film length
in either of these, the entire length of weld in that joint greater than 10 in. (254 mm) in length. For panoramic
shall be tested radiographically. exposures, three penetrameters shall be placed 120 de-
8.10 Radiographic Procedure grees apart around the object being radiographed.Penet-
rameters shall be placed on the source side whenever
8.10.1 Radiographs shall be made by either x-ray or possible. Failure to prove adequate sensitivity on all
isotope radiation methods. Radiography shall be con- three penetrameters shall disqualify the exposure, and
ducted in accordance with ASTM E94, Standard Recom- the entire technique shall be repeated.
mended Practice for Radiographic Testing,and ASTM
E142, Standard Methodfor Controlling Quality of Ra-
13. H & D density, D, is a measure of film blackening
diographic Testing,latest revisions.
expressed as D = log &/I), where:
8.10.2 The radiographic sensitivity shall be judged I, = light intensity on the film
based on penetrameters. Radiographic technique and I = light transmitted through the film
Table 19
Penetrameter Requirements(see 8.10.2)
ilm Side Source
Rangea
Thickness
Material
Nominal
in. Hole Essential
mmDesignationHole Essential
Designation
Up to 0.25 incl. Up to 6.4 incl. 10 4T 7 4T
Over 0.25 through 0.375 Over 6.4 to 9.5 12 4T 10 4T
Over 0.375 through 0.50 Over 9.5 to 12.7 15
4T 12 4T
Over 0.50through 0.625 Over 12.7 through 15.9 4T 15 4T 12
Over 0.625 through 0.75 Over 15.9 through 19.0
15 4T 17 4T
Over 0.75 through 0.875 Over 19.0 through 22.2 20 4T 17 4T
Over 1.00 through 1.25 Over 25.4 through 31.7 4T 25 20 4T
Over 1.25 through 1S O Over 3 1.7 through 38.1 30 25 2T 2T
Over 1.50 through 2.00 Over 38.1 through 50.8 2T 35 30 2T
Over 2.00 through 2.50 Over 50.8 through 63.5 40 35 2T 2T
Over 3.00 through 4.00 Over 76.2 through 102 50 2T 45 2T
Over 4.00 through 6.00 Over 102 through 152 60 2T 50 2T
Over 6.00 through 8.00 Over 152 through 203 80 2T 60 2T
Notes:
a. Single wall radiographic thickness (for tubulars).
b. Applicable to tubular structures only.
STD*AWS D14-L-ENGL
105
8.10.5 Radiographs shall be made using a single 8.11 Acceptability of Radiographed Welds
source of radiation approximately centered with respect 8.11.1 Welds subject to radiographic examination
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
to the length andwidth of the area being examined. The shall first be visually examined in conformance to the
minimum source-to-object distance shallbe the greater of requirements of 8.6 and8.7.
the film lengthor 7 times the maximum thickness of the
8.11.2 The greatest dimension of any porosity or
weld being examined. For panoramic exposures, the min-
fusion-type discontinuity indications that are 1/16 in.
imum source-to-object distance shallbe 7 times the max-
(1.6 mm) or larger shall not exceed the size, B, indicated
imum weld thickness. During exposure, the film shallbe
in Figure 36 for the effective throatof a groove weld or
as close as possible to the opposite sideof the weld being
weld size of a fillet weld. The distance fromany indica-
examined. Edge blocks shall be used when radiographing
tion of porosity or fusion-type discontinuity to another
butt joints greater than 1/2 in. (1 3 mm) thick. The mini-
such indication, to an edge, or to any intersecting weld
mum width of the edge blocks shall be 1 in. (25 mm) or
shall not be less than the minimum clearance allowed,C,
half the weld thickness, whichever is greater. The edge
indicated in Figure 36 for the sizeof discontinuity under
blocks shall have a thickness equal to or greater than the
examination. Annex C illustrates the application of the
thickness of the weld being radiographed.
requirements givenin 8.11.2.
8.10.6 All radiographs shall be free from chemical 8.11.3 Discontinuities meeting requirementsof 8.11.1
and mechanical blemishes that could mask discontinui- and having a greatest dimension of less than 1/16 in.
ties in the area of interest. Such blemishes include, but (1.6 mm) are nevertheless not acceptable if the sum of
are not limited to, finger prints, crimps, screen marks, their greatest dimensions exceeds3/8 in. (9.5 mm) in any
water marks, streaks, chemical stains, and fogging.Film linear inch (25 mm) of weld.
identification shallbe made permanent on the film by ra- 8.11.4 The limitations for 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) groove
diographic image, lead tape, flash type ID, or &her ap- weld effective throat given in Figure 36 shall applyto all
proved means. welds with larger effective throats.
112
O 112 1 1-112 2 2-112 3 3-1I2 4 I2 4-1

C - MINIMUM CLEARANCE MEASURED ALONG THE LONGITUDINAL AXIS OF THE WELD
BETWEEN EDGESOF POROSITY OR FUSION-TYPE DISCONTINUITIES,in.
(LARGER OF ADJACENT DISCONTINUITIES GOVERNS)
NOTE: ADJACENT DISCONTINUITIES, SPACEDLESS THAN THE MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE SHALL BE MEASURED AS
ONE LENGTH EQUAL TO THE SUMOF THE TOTAL LENGTH OF THE DISCONTINUITIES PLUS THE LENGTH
OF THE SPACE
BETWEEN THEM AND EVALUATED AS A SINGLE DISCONTINUITY.
Figure 36-Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Welds

(Limitation of Porosity and Fusion-Type Discontinuities)
106
8.11.5 A recommended form for reporting the results weld, be included in the information furnished to bid-
of radiographic examinationis shown in Annex A. ders. When spot testing reveals discontinuities that re-
quire repair, two adjacent spots shall be tested. If
8.12 Examination, Report, and D w i t i o n of Radiographs discontinuities requiring repair are revealed in either of
8.12.1 The contractor shall provide a suitable high- these, the entire length of the weld in thatjoint shall be
intensity viewer with sufficient capacity to illuminate tested ultrasonically.
radiographs with a density of 4.0 without difficulty. It
8.14 Ultrasonic Testing Equipment and Calibration
is recommended that at least a two-level or variable-
intensity illuminator be used. 8.14.1 The apparatus for ultrasonic examination shall
meet the requirements of ASTM E164,Recommended
8.12.2 All radiographs of welds that are subject to
Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weld-
contractual radiographic examination by the manufac-
ments, and ASTM E317, Recommended Practices for
turer, including those that show unacceptable quality
Evaluating Pe$ormance Characteristics of Pulse-Echo
prior to repair, and a report interpreting them,shall be
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Ultrasonic Testing Systems. Refer to ASTM E500,Defi-

available forreview by the purchaser’s representativebe-
nitions of Terms Relating to Ultrasonic Testing for stan-
fore the weld is accepted.
dard definitionsof terms.
8.12.3 A full set of radiographs for welds subject to
8.14.2 Test instruments shall include internal stabili-
radiographic examination by the manufacturer for the
zation so that, after warm up, no variationin response
purchaser, including those that show unacceptable qual-
greater than & 1 dB occurs with supply voltage changes
ity prior to repair, shall be delivered to the purchaser
of 15 percent nominal or, in the case of battery powered
upon completion of the work. The manufacturer’s obli-
instruments, overthe battery charge operating life. There
gation to retain radiographs shall cease(1) upon delivery
shall bean alarm or meter to signal a drop in battery volt-
of this full set to the purchaser, (2) one full year after
age prior to instrument shutoff due tobattery exhaustion.
completion of the manufacturer’s work,in the event that
delivery is not required, or (3) as otherwise statedin the 8.14.3 The test instrument shallhave a calibrated gain
contract. control (attenuator) adjustablein discrete 1 or 2 dB steps
over arange of at least 60 dB.
8.13 Ultrasonic Examinationof Welds
8.14.4 The dynamic range of the instrument’s display
8.13.1 The procedures and standards set forthin this
shall be such that a difference of 1 dB of amplitude can
section govern the ultrasonic examination of groove
be easily detected.
welds between the thicknesses of 5/16 in. (8 mm) and
8 in. (203 mm) inclusive, when such testing is required 8.14.5 Each search unit shall be marked to clearlyin-
by 8.8 of this specification. These procedures and stan- dicate the frequency of the transducer, nominal angle of
dards are not to be used as a basis for rejection of the refraction, andindex point.
base metal.
8.14.6 Preferred couplants are a cellulose gum-water
8.13.2 Variations in testing procedure, equipment, and mixture, and glycerine with a wetting agent. Wherepos-
acceptance standardsnot included in this section may be sible, avoid the use of oil or grease as the couplantfor
used by agreement between the manufacturer and pur- examination of welds. If oil or grease are used as cou-
chaser. Such variations include other thicknesses, weld plants, the requirements of 5.2.1 must be met before any
geometries, transducer sizes, frequencies,and couplants. repairs are made.
8.13.3 Spot radiography is suggested to supplement 8.14.7 The horizontal linearity of the test instrument
ultrasonic testing of electroslag and electrogas groove shall be within plus-or-minus 5 percent over the linear
welds in material 2 in. (5 1 mm) and over in thickness to range that includes 90 percent of the sweep length pre-
detect possiblepiping porosity. sented on the display for the longest sound path to be
used. The horizontal linearity shall be measured by the
8.13.4 Information furnished to bidders shall clearly
techniques prescribed in Section 7.9 of ASTM E317,ex-
identify the extent of ultrasonic testing required.
cept that the results may be tabulated ratherthan graphi-
8.13.5 Complete testing, when specified, requires cally represented. Horizontal linearity shallbe checked
testing of the entire length of the weld in each designated after each 40 hours of instrument use.
joint.
8.14.8 Internal reflections fromthe search unit, with a
8.13.6 Spot testing, when specified, requires that the screen presentation higherthan the horizontal reference
number of spots in each designated categoryof weld, or line, appearing on the screen to the right of the sound
the number required to be made in a stated length of entry point shall not occur beyond1/2 in. (1 3 mm) equiv-
107
alent distance in steelwhen the sensitivity is as follows: in position Q on the resolution block. The resolution
20 dB more than that required to produce a maximized shall be evaluated with the instrument controlsset at nor-
horizontal reference-line height indication from the mal test settings, and with indications from the holes
1/16 in. (1.5 mm) diameter holein the InternationalInsti- brought to midscreen height. Resolution shall be suffi-
tute of Welding (IIW) referenceblock (see ASTM E164). cient to distinguish at least the peaks of indications from
the three holes.
8.14.9 The dimensions of search unit shall be such
that the minimal allowable distance, X, between the toe 8.14.10.2 To determine longitudinal wave resolu-
of the search unit and the edgeof the IIW block, shallbe tion, the instrument controls must be at normal settings
as follows: with indications from the holes brought to midscreen
( 1 ) 70 degree transducer,X = 2 in. (5 1 mm) height (see Figure 37B).
( 2 ) 60 degree transducer, X = 1-5/8 in. (41 mm) (1) Set the transducer in position F on the IIW block.
(3) 45 degree transducer, X = 1 in. (25 mm) ( 2 ) Transducer and instrument should resolveall three
The searchunit shall be positioned formaximum indi- distances.
cation from the 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) diameter hole in the
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
IIW calibration block. 8.14.11 The IIW ultrasonic reference block, shown in
ASTM E164, shall be the standard used for both distance
8.14.10 Resolution
and sensitivity calibration. More portable reference
8.14.10.1 For shear waves, the combination of blocks of other designs may be used, provided they meet
search unit and instrument shall resolve the appropriate the requirements of this specification and are referenced
three holes in the resolution test block shown in Figure back to the IIW block. Approved designs are shown in
37A. For a 70 degree angle, the transducer should be set ASTM E164. See Figure 37B for application.
MAXIMUM
A OF 12Epin. RMS.
ALL
HOLES
ARE 1/16 in. IN DIAMETER
Figure 37A"RC"Resolution Reference Block
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
@‘
IIW BLOCK
M= BLOCK
DSC BLOCK
RESOLUTION BLOCK
SC BLOCK
DS BLOCK
Figure 37B-Transducer Positions (Typical)
S T D - A W S D14.L-ENGL 1777 0 7 8 4 2 0b 5 0 7 b 4 5
5b7 m
1o9
8.14.12 Using a corner reflector for calibration pur- Type 1 block, or at 4 in. (102mm) and 8 in. (203 mm)
rohibited.
om is poses block.Type 2
(c) Set the transducerin position J or L on the DSC
8.14.13 The gain control (attenuator) of the instru-
block (any angle).
ment shall meet the requirements of 8.14.3 and shall be
(d) Adjust the instrument to obtain indications on
checked for correct calibration at two-month intervals in
the display at 1 in. (25 mm), 5 in. (127 mm), 9 in.
accordance with a procedure approved by the manufac-
(229 mm) in the J position, or at 3 in. (76 mm). and 7 in.
turer of the instrument.
(1 78mm) in the L position.
8.14.14 With the use of an approved calibrationblock, (e) Set the transducerin position I on the DC block
each angle-beam search unit shall be checked after each (any angle).
eight hoursof use to determinethat (1) the contact faceis (0 Adjust the instrument to obtain indications on
flat, (2) the sound entry
point is correct,and (3) thebeam the display at 1 in. ( 2 5 mm), 2 in. ( 5 1 mm), 3 in.
angle is within the permitted plus-or-minus two degree (76 mm), 4 in. (102 mm),and so forth.
tolerance. Search units that do not meet these require- (2) With the unit adjusted to conformwith the require-
ments shallbe corrected or replaced. ments of 8.14.1 through 8.14.10, the sensitivity shall be
8.14.15 Calibration for sensitivity and horizontal adjusted by the use of the gain control (attenuator) so that
sweep (distance) shall be made at the location of testing a horizontal reference-level trace deflection results on
by the ultrasonic operator just prior to examination of the display with the maximum indication from the
each weld and at intervals of 30 minutes during examina- 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) diameter hole in the IIW block or from
tion. Recalibration shall be made when (1) there is a the equivalent reference reflectorin other acceptable cal-
change of operators, (2) transducers are changed,(3) new ibration blocks. This basic sensitivity then becomes the
batteries are installed, and (4) equipment operating from zero reference level for discontinuity evaluation and
a 110 volt source is connectedto a differentpower outlet. shall be recorded on the ultrasonic test reports under ref-
erence level. SeeAnnex A for a sample ultrasonictest re-
8.14.16 Calibration for straight beam testing shall be port form.
performed as follows: (a) Set the transducer in position A on the IIW
(1) The horizontal sweep shall be adjusted for dis- block (any angle).
tance calibration to present the equivalent of a least two (b) Adjust the maximized signal from the 0.060 in.
plate thicknesses on the display. (1.5 mm) hole to attain a horizontal reference-lineheight
(a) Set the transducer in position G on the IIW indication.
block, position H on the DC block, or position M on the (c) Set the transducer in position L on the DSC
DSC block (see Figure 37B). block (any angle).
(b) Adjust instrument to produce indications at 1 (d) Adjust the maximized signal from the 1/32 in.
i n . (25 mm), 2 i n . (51 mm), 3 in. (76 mm), 4 in. (0.8 mm) slot to attain a horizontal reference-lineheight
(102 mm), etc.on the display. indication.
(2) The sensitivity (gain) shall be adjusted at a loca- (e) Set the transducer on the SC block in position
tion free of indications so that the first back reflection N for 70 degree angle, position O for 45 degree angle, or
from the far side of the plate will be 50 to 70 percent of position P for 60 degree angle.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
full screen height. For this purpose, the reject (clipping) (0 Adjust the maximized signal from the 1/16 in.
control shall be turned off. (1.6 mm) hole to attain a horizontal reference-line height
8.14.17 Calibration for angle beam testing shall be indication.
performed as follows: (g) The decibel reading obtained in (f) shall be
( 1 ) The horizontal sweep shall be adjusted to repre- used as the reference level, b, reading on the test report
sent the actual sound-path distance by using acceptable sheet (see Annex A).
distance calibration blocks shown in Figure 37B and
8.15 Ultrasonic Testing Procedure, AcceptanceCrite-
ASTM E164. This distance calibration shall be made
ria, and Reports
using either the 5 in. (127 mm) scale or the I O in.
(254 mm) scale on the display, whichever is appropriate, 8.15.1 The letter Y accompanied by a weld identifica-
unless joint configuration or thickness prevents full ex- tion number shall be clearly marked on the base metal
amination of the weld at either of these settings. adjacent to theweld at the left end of each weld that is ul-
(a) Set the transducer in position D on the IIW trasonically examined. This identificationnumber serves
block (any angle). as an orientation directionfor weld discontinuity location
(b) Adjust the instrument to obtain indications on and as the report number on the report form (see Annex
the display at 4 in. (102 mm) and 9 in. (229 mm) from a A for suggestedreport form).
110
8.15.2 All surfaces to which a search unit is applied (a) Search unit rotation angle, e, between 45 and
shall be free of weld spatter, dirt, grease, oil, (other
than 60 degrees.
that used as a couplant) and loose scale and shall have a (b) Scanning pattern shall ensure that the full weld
contour permitting intimate coupling. Tight layers of section is covered.
paint need not be removed unless their combined thick-
ness exceeds 0.010 in. (0.25 mm). 8.15.6 Welds shall be examined using an angle beam
search unit conforming to the requirements of 8.14 and
8.15.3 A couplant shall be used between the search ASTM E164. Following calibration and during testing,
unit and the metal. The couplantshould be either glycer- the only instrument adjustment permitted is in the sen-
ine with a wetting agent, if needed, or a cellulose gum sitivity-level adjustment with the calibrated gain control
and water mixture of a suitable consistency. Lightma- or attenuator. Sensitivity shall be increased from the
chine oil,or equivalent, may beused for couplant oncal- reference level for weld scanning in accordance with
ibration blocks. Table 2 1.
8.15.4 The entire base metal through which ultrasonic 8.15.6.1 If mechanically possible, all welds shall
vibrations must travel to test the weld shallbe examined be scanned from both sides on the same face for longitu-
for laminar reflectors, using a straight beam search unit dinal and transverse discontinuities.
The applicable scan-
conforming to the requirementsof 8.14. If any area of ning pattern, or patterns, shown in Figure 38 shall be
base metal exhibits total lossof back reflection and islo- used.
cated in a position that would interfere with the normal
weld scanning procedure, the following alternate weld 8.15.6.2 The testing angle shall be as shown in
'scanning procedure shallbe used. Alternate weld proce- Table 20.
dure inspection may also be conducted in accordance 8.15.6.3 When a discontinuity indication appears
with ASTM E164. on the screen, the maximum attainable indication from
(1) The area of the laminar reflector and its depth the discontinuity shallbe adjusted to produce a horizon-
from the surface shall be determined and reported on the tal reference level trace deflection on the display. This
ultrasonic test report. adjustment shall be made with the calibrated gain control
(2) If part of a weld is inaccessible to testing in accor- or attenuator, and the instrument readingin decibels shall
dance with the requirements ofTable 20 because of lam- be recorded onthe ultrasonic test report under the head-
inar content recorded in accordance with 8.15.4( l), the ing Indication Level, a.
testing shall be conductedby using an alternate scanning
pattern described in 8.15.5, by first grinding the weld 8.15.6.4 The attenuation factor,c, onthe test report
surfaces flush to make total weld areas accessible ul- to is attained by subtracting 1 in. (25 mm) from the sound-
trasonic testing,or both. path distance and multiplying the remainder by 2.
8.15.5 Alternate Scanning Patterns(See Figure 38.) 8.15.6.5 The indication rating, d. on the test report
(1) Longitudinal Discontinuities. Scanning patterns is the difference between the reference level and the indi-
shall consist of the following combined movements: cation level after the indication level has been corrected
(a) Scanning movement A-Rotation angle, a, by the attenuation factor.
equals 10 degrees. Instruments with gain in dB: a-b-c = d
(b) Scanning movementB-Scanning distance, b,
Instruments with attenuation in dB: b-a-c = d
shall be sufficient to ensurethat the section of weld being
examined is covered. 8.15.6.6 The length of a discontinuity, as entered
(c) Scanning movementC-Progression distance, under indication length on thetest report, shall be deter-
c, shall be approximately one-half of the transducer mined by locating the points at each end at which the
width. indication amplitude drops 6 dB (50 percent) and
(2) Transverse Discontinuities. measuring between the centerlines of those transducer
(a) Scanning patternD-when welds are ground locations.
flush.
8.15.6.7 Each weld discontinuity shall be accepted
(b) Scanning patternE-when weld is not ground
or rejected on the basis of its indication rating and its
flush.
length in accordance with Table 2 1. Only those disconti-
(c) Scanning angle = e 15 degree maximum.
nuities which are rejectable need be recorded on the test
(d) Scanning pattern shall ensurethe full weld sec-
report.
tion is covered.
(3) Electroslag or Electrogas Welds. (additional scan- 8.15.7 Each rejectable discontinuity shallbe indicated
ning pattern)-scanning pattern E on the weld by a mark directly over the discontinuity for
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
S T D - A W S DL4.L-ENGL L797 07842b5 0 5 0 7 b 4 7 3 3 T I
111
Table 20
Testing Angle
Procedure Chart
Material Thickness, in.
5/16 > 1-112 > 1-314 >2-112 >3-112 >4-1I2 >5 >6-112 >7
to to to to to to to to to
Weld Type 1-112 1-314 2-112 3- 1 / 2 4- 112 5 6-1/2 I 8
* * * * * * * * *
1G 1G 6 8 9 12
Butt 1 0 1 F o r F or F or F or F or F or F 12 F
4 5 7 10 II 13
F F F F F F F
T- l O l o r 4 o r 5 or 7 or 10 or 11 or 13 or - -
XF XF XF XF XF XF XF
F 1G F 1 G F 6 F 8 F 9 F 1 3 F
Comer 1 O 1 or or or or or or or or of or or or or - -
XF 4 XF 5 XF 7 XF 10 XF 11 XF 14 XF
Electrogas 1G 1G P1 6 11 11 11 II
& 1 O 1 O or I**or or or P3 or P3 or P3 or P3 or P3
; Q:FA:iAN;z"J,
Electroslag 4 3 P3 7 15 15 15 15**
FACE AT X r FACEA
.:.:.:.:.,.
..........
..:.:
i$?*.
FACE
C
QTA .:::A
........
.....
...
.....
FACE B
c
FACE
.:.:.:.>
.......
........
i.:..
L.:..
..:.:.:..
:.:.:.>,
........
RECEIVER
i.......
:.:.:.: ,
.:.:.:.:.
.....
.........
.:.:.:.i.
..........
i:.:.:.:
....
c-:.:.:.
I
~
FACEBJ x LFACEB l FACE B X

X I
BUTT JOINT JOINT CORNER x T-JOINT
PITCH-AND-CATCH
r FACEA , r GROUND
FLUSH
MIDDLE HALF-70'
Notes:
I . Where possible, all examinations shall be made from Face A and in Leg 1, unless otherwise noted in this table.
2. Root areas of single groove weld joints which have backing not requiring removal by contract, shall be tested in Leg 1, where possible, with Face A
being that opposite the backing. (Grinding of the weld face or testing from additional weld faces may be necessary to permit complete scanning of
the weld root.)
3. Examination in Leg II or III shall be made only to satisfy provisions of this table or when necessary to test weld areas made inaccessible by an un-
ground weld surface, or interference with other portions of the weldment.
~
4. A maximum of Leg III shall be used only where thickness or geometry prevents scanning of complete weld areas and heat-affected zones in Leg I
i or Leg 11.
I
5 . On tension welds in cyclically loaded structures, the top quarter of thickness shall be tested with the final leg of sound progressing from Face B to-
ward Face A. the bottom quarter of thickness shall be tested with the final leg of sound progressing from Face A toward Face B; ¡.e., the top quarter
of thickness shall be tested either from Face A in Leg II or from Face B in Leg I at the contractor's option, unless otherwise specified in the contract
documents.
6. The weld face indicated shall be ground flush before using procedure IG. 6, 8,9, 12, 14, or 15. Face A for both connected members shall be in the
same plane.
(See Legend on next page)
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
~~
S T D = A W S DL4.L-ENGL L997 07842b5

0507b48 27b m
112
~ -~
Legend
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
X -Checkfrom
Face"C."
C -Grindweld faceflush.
O -Not
required.
A Face-the face of the material from which the initial scanning is done (on T- and comer joints, follow above
sketches).
B Face -opposite the "A" face (same plate).
C Face -the face opposite the weld on the connecting member or a T- or comer joint.
* -Required only where reference level indication of discontinuity is noted in fusion zone while searching
at scanning level with primary procedures selected from first column.
** -Use 15 in. (380 mm) or 20 in. (510 mm) screen distance calibration.
P -Pitch and catch shall be conducted for further discontinuity evaluation in only the middle half of the
material thickness with only 45 deg or 70 deg transducers of equal specification, both facing the weld.
(Transducers preferably held ainfixture to control positioning-see sketch.) Amplitude calibration for
pitch and catch is normally made by calibrating a single search unit. When switching to dual search
units for pitch and catch inspection, there should be assurance that this calibration does notaschange a
result of instrument variables.
F -Further evaluate fusion zone in indication with either 70 deg, 60 deg, or 45 deg transducer-whichever
sound path is nearest to being perpendicular to the suspected fusion surface.
Procedure Legend
Area of Weld Thickness
TOP Middle Bottom

No. Quarter Half Quarter
1 70" 70" 70"
2 60" 60" 60"
~ ~
3 45" 45" 45"
4 70" 60" 70"

5 70" 70"
6 A 70°C 70" 60"
7 60" B 70" 60"
8 70°CA 60" 60"
9 70°CA 60" 45"
10 60" B 60" 60"

11 45" B 70°** 45"
12 70°C A 45" 70"G B

13 45" B
45" 45"
14 70°C A 45" 45"
15 A 70°C 70"A B 70°C B
S T D - A W S D L V * L - E N G L L777
113
r WELD AXIS
PATTERN D
PATTERN E
t-c+
"7--r-""
I 1 -\
RMOVEMENT A
i-?
,-*'
+ I
t-c+
MOVEMENT C
MOVEMENT B
Notes:
1. Testing patterns are all symmetrical around the weld axis with the exception of pattern D which is conducted
directly over the weld axis.
2. Testing from both sides of the weld axis is to be made wherever mechanically possible.
Figure 38-Plan View of UT Scanning Patterns
its entire length. The depth from the surface and type of quality prior to repair, shall be available for review by
1 discontinuity shall be
noted on nearby base metal. the purchaser's representative before the weld is ac-
cepted.
8.15.8 Welds found unacceptable by ultrasonic testing
, shall be repaired by methods permitted by section 10. 8.15.11 A full set of completed report forms of welds
Weld Repairs, of this specification. Repaired welds shall subject to contractual ultrasonic testing by the manufac-
be reexamined ultrasonically, and an additional report turer for the purchaser, including any that show unac-
form completed. ceptable quality prior to repair, shall be delivered to the
purchaser upon completion of the work. The manufac-
8.15.9 A report form which clearly identifies the work turer's obligation to retain ultrasonic reports shall cease
and the area of inspection shall be completed by the ul- (1) upon delivery of this full set to the purchaser or ( 2 ) at
trasonic inspector at the time of the inspection. The re- the end of one full year after completion of the manufac-
port form for welds that are unacceptable need only turer's work, in the event that delivery is not required, or
contain sufficient information to identify the weld, the as otherwise provided in the contract.
inspector (signature), and the acceptabilityof the weld.
An example of such a form is shown in Annex A. 8.16 Magnetic Particle Examination of Welds
8.15.10 All report forms pertaining to a weld subject 8.16.1 The procedure and technique for magnetic par-
to contractual ultrasonic testing by the manufacturer for ticle examination, when required, shall be in accordance
the purchaser, including those that show unacceptable with ASTM E709, Practice for Magnetic Particle In-
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
114
spection (latest edition), and the standardsof acceptance position of the components shall be identified and the
shall be in accordance with 8.16.4. welding procedures approved by the Engineer before
starting repair or modification. The repairand modifica-
8.16.2 Variations in testing procedure, equipment, and
tion work shall conform toall applicable sectionsof this
acceptance standards not included in this specification
specification. Whena modification includes removal, ad-
may be used upon agreement between the manufacturer
dition, or alteration of structural members, the Engineer
and the purchaser.
shall verify that the original design requirements aresat-
8.16.3 Welds subject to magnetic particle examination isfied. Thissection is a guide to aid the manufacturer and
shall first be subject to visual examinationin accordance the purchaserby suggesting pertinent itemsthat shall be
with the requirements of 8.6 and 8.7. considered at the time of initial contract negotiations.
The eventual need for field weld repairs asa result of
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
8.16.4 Welds that are subject to magnetic particleex-

amination shall be unacceptable if any discontinuitiesex- normal wear andtear, modification, or accident is often
ceed the following limits: forgotten. Every repair, no matter how small, becomes
(1) A magnetic particle indicationof any porosity or the total responsibility of the purchaserand the organiza-
fusion-type discontinuity, that is 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) or tion performing the repair work, who must consider its
larger in greatest dimension, shallnot exceed the size,B, effect on the equipment involved. The original manufac-
indicated in Figure 36 for the effective throat or weld turer should be contacted to ensurethat the projected re-
size involved. The distance from any indication of an ac- pair is advisable and sound from an engineering
ceptable porosityor fusion-type discontinuity to another standpoint. Safe recommended repairsand modifications
discontinuity, to an edge, or to any intersecting weld can only be accomplished with a knowledgeof the de-
shall not be less than the minimum clearance, C, indi- sign loading on the equipment and the resulting stresses
cated by Figure 36 forthe size of discontinuity under ex- at the repair locations.
amination. (Annex C illustrates the application of the Caution: Leaking of flammable liquids from pres-
requirements given. A sample report form is shown in surized lines may exist andshall be addressed to pre-
Annex A). vent fires when welding and cutting is performed.
(2) Discontinuities meeting the requirements of Confined space circumstances can also exist on some
8.16.4( 1) and having a greatest dimensionof less than repair operations.
1/16 in. (1.6 mm) are neverthelessnot acceptable if the
9.2 Field Repair-Manufacturer’s Responsibility.
sum of their greatest dimensions exceeds 3/8 in.
The manufacturer shall furnish, as a part of instruction
(9.5 mm) in any linear inch (25 mm) of weld.
manuals or as a separate publication, instructions for
(3) The limitations given by Figure 36 for a groove
field repairwhen required by the contract.The complete-
weld effective throat of 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) shall apply to
ness and extent of material identification andwelding re-
groove welds of greater thickness.
pair procedures shall be covered in the contract.
8.17 Liquid Penetrant Examinationof Welds
9.2.1 Instructions by the manufacturer shall include
8.17.1 When liquid penetrant examination is required, the following:
the procedure and techniqueshall be in accordance with (1) Qualification requirementsof the welder perform-
ASTM E165, Recommended Practicefor Liquid Pene- ing the repair (see Section 7, Qualification, for minimum
want Inspecrion (latest edition). The standard of accep- requirement).
tance shall be in accordance with 8.17.3. (2) A list of materials used in the manufacture of the
equipment and the location of materials by some appro-
8.17.2 Variations in testing procedure, equipment,
and
priate means such as an outline drawing. This shall in-
acceptance standards not included in this specification
clude lists and locations of those materials that (a) are
may be used upon agreement between the manufacturer
easily weldable without preheat or postheat treatment,
and purchaser.
provided ambient temperatures are considered normal,
8.17.3 Welds that are subject to liquid penetrant ex- and (b) require special welding procedures. For special
amination shallbe evaluated on the basis of the require- welding procedures, the manufacturer shall include in-
ments for visual inspection as defined in 8.6 and 8.7. formation concerningthe base metals, filler metals, and
preheat or postheat treatment so that properly qualified
welders can make an acceptable weld repair.
9. Field Weld Repair and
9.2.2 All field weld repair procedures shall include
Modification recommended means for inspectionor testing of the re-
9.1 General. Repairs and modifications shallrequire the pair by the Engineer or the equipment manufacturer and
approval of the Engineer (see 9.3.1). The material com- necessary nondestructive testing procedures.
STD.AWS DLV.1-ENGL 1997 W 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 n509b51
115
Table 21
Ultrasonic Acceptance-Rejection Criteria
Weld Thickness* and Search Unit Angle
Notes:
I . Class B and C flaws shall be separated by at least 2L, L being the length of the longer flaw, except that when two or more such flaws are not
separated by at least 2L, but the combined length of flaws and their separation distance is equal to or less than the maximum allowable length under
the provisions of Class B or C, the flaw shall be considered a single acceptable flaw.
2. Class B and C flaws shall not begin at a distance less than 2L from the end of the weld, L being the flaw length.
3. Flaws detected at “scanning level” in the root face area of complete penetration double groove weld joints shall be evaluated using an indicating
rating 4 dB more sensitive than described in 8.15.6.5 when such welds are designated as “tension welds” on the drawing (subtract 4 dB from the
indication rating ‘ W ) .
*Weld thickness shall be defined as the nominal thickness of the thinner of the two parts being joined.
Class A (large flaws)

Any indication in this category shall be rejected (regardless of length). Scanning Levels
Class B (medium flaws) Above Zero
Any indication in this category having a length greater than 3/4 in. path Sound (in.)* dBReference,
( 19 mm) shall be rejected.
Class C (small flaws) through 2-1/2 (64 mm) 20

Any indication in this category having a length greater than 2 i n . > 2-1/2 through 5 (64-127 mm) 25
(51 mm) length in the middle half or 314 in. (19 mm) length in the top > 5 through 10 (127-254 mm) 35
of bottom quarter of weld thickness shall be rejected.
> 10 through 15 (254-381 mm) 45
Class D (minor flaws)
Any indication in this category shall be accepted regardless of length or *This column refers to sound path distance; NOT material thickness.
location in the weld.
9.2.3 The manufacturers should list special precau- The manufacturer shall indicate weldments and com-
tions for field welding of their products and other neces- ponents on which field repairs are not recommended.
sary precautions. The following items should be
addressed: 9.2.4 Safety precautions and good workmanship in-
Field repair should not proceed ( 1 ) without adequate structions listed in the various ANSI and AWS specifica-
preparation (thorough cleaning and joint preparation) tions shall be followed, including ANSI/ASC 249.1,
and a full review of any previous repairs in the area in- Safety in Welding, Curring, und Allied Processes.
volved, (2) until the welder and weld repair area are ade- 9.3 Field Repair-Purchaser’s Responsibility
quately protected from the elements, and a proper
equipment environment is provided, or (3) without con- 9.3.1 The purchaser shall appoint the Engineer who
sidering the stresses onthe members. shall be responsible for the actual field execution of the
A method by which stressescan be relieved before weld- repair work, and the complete detailed adherence to the
ing, as well as the sequence of repair, should be considered. repair procedures furnished by the manufacturer.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
STD=AWS
DLIImL-ENGL L977 078q2b5 0 5 0 7 b 5 2 7 T 7 D
116
9.3.2 Purchasers or their agents shall permit only 10.2.2 Arc Strikes and Temporary Attachment
qualified and properly trained personnel to perform field Areas. Arc strikes or severed temporary welds shall be
weld repairs, such as welders qualifiedin accordance ground smooth to ensure that no abrupt change in section
with this specification. exists. The smoothed area shall be inspected by an ap-
9.3.3 Full and complete recordsof all repaired welds propriate nondestructive testing method to ensure that
shall be maintained by means of marked outline draw- there are no existing cracks or similar discontinuities.
ings or other appropriate documents. The Engineermay require hardness testingof the area to
verify material properties. Any cracks or similar discon-
tinuities mustbe repaired in accordance with10.1.3.
10. Repair and Correction of Defects
10.3 Removal of Defective Areas. The removal of weld
10.1 Weld Repairs metal or portions of the base metal may be done by ma-
10.1.1 Overlap or Excessive Convexity. Excess chining, grinding, chipping, oxygen gouging, or air car-
weld metal shall be removed. bon arc gouging. It shall be done in such a manner that
the remaining weld metal is notnicked or undercut. Oxy-
10.1.2 Excessive Concavity of Weld or Crater and gen gouging shallnot be used on quenched andtempered
Undersize Welds. Prepare surfaces and deposit addi- steel. Unacceptable portions of the weld shall be re-
tional weld metal. All slag shall be removed and the moved without substantial removal of the base metal.
adjacent base metal shall be clean before additional Additional weldmetal, to compensate for any deficiency
welding. in size, shall be deposited using low-hydrogen elec-
10.1.3 Cracks in Weld or Base Metal.Determine the trodes, preferably smaller in diameter than those used for
extent of the crack by liquid penetrant, magnetic particle making the original weld, and preferablynot more than
examination, or other suitable means. Remove the crack 5/32 in. (4 mm) i n diameter. The surfaces shall be
and adjacent soundmetal for a 2 in. (51 mm) length be- cleaned thoroughly beforewelding. Defects that occur in
yond each endof the crack. material handling that do not affect the structural integ-
Prior to rewelding, these areas shall
be checked by an rity of the design canbe repaired by grinding.
appropriate inspection method, such as magnetic particle
or liquid penetrant, to ensure complete removal of 10.4 Distortion and Camber. Members distorted by
.cracked material. After reweldingin conformance to an welding may be straightenedby mechanical means or by
approved repair welding procedure, reinspect the re- carefully supervised application of a limited amount of
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
paired area(s) per Section 8. localized heat. The temperature of heated areas, as mea-
sured by approved methods, shallbe limited to that im-
10.1.4 Undercutting. Undercutting may be repaired posed by the materials exposed to the heat, but it shall
by grinding and blending orby welding. It is preferably not exceed 1100°F (590°C) for quenched and tempered
done by careful grinding and blending. Grinding should or normalized and tempered steels,nor 1200°F (65OOC)
be performed with a pencil-type grinder. The grinding for other steels. The part to be heated for straightening
marks shouldbe transverse to the lengthof the weld, and shall be substantially free of stress and external forces,
have a 250x lod in. (6 x 10" m) finish or better. Blend-
except those stresses resulting from the mechanical
ing shall be done with a slope not to exceed 1 in 3. On
straightening method used in conjunction with the appli-
plates of 1/2 in. (13 mm) thickness and above, up to
cation of heat. All heat-straightening operations shall be
7 percent reduction of base-material thickness ispermit-
covered by an approved written procedure (see5.2.4).
ted. Repair of undercut areas by grinding and blendingin
excess of this amount may be permitted with the ap- 10.5 Correction of Improperly Fitted andWelded
proval of the designEngineer. When undercut is to bere- Members. If a weld is found to be unacceptable afterad-
paired by welding, the surfaces should be prepared and ditional work has rendered it inaccessible, or new con-
then additional weld metal deposited. ditions make correction of the unacceptable weld
10.1.5 Weld areas containing unacceptable incom- be
dangerous or ineffectual, the original conditions shall
plete fusion,porosity or slag inclusions shallbe removed restored by removing weldsor members, or both, before
(see 10.3) and rewelded. the corrections are made. If this is not done, the def-
iciency shall be compensated for by additional work
10.2 Base Metal Repairs performed according to an approved revised design. Im-
103.1 Defects in Edges of Plate. If a defect is found properly fitted and welded members require design Engi-
in a plate edgethat exceeds the limits imposedin Table 7, neer approval prior to cutting apart. Cutting is to be
it shall be removed and repaired in accordance with 5.3. handled by methods similar to thosein 10.3.
S T D m A W S D 1 4 - 1 - E N G L 1777 P 070q2b5 0507b53 b 3 3
Annex A
Suggested Forms
(This Annex is not a partof ANSUAWS D14.1-97, Spec8cation for Welding of Industrial and MillCranes and Other
Material Handling Equipment, but is included for information purposesonly.)
Commentary on the Useof Welding Procedure Forms Qualified by Testing

(Front) and (Back)
The WPS may be qualified by testing in accordance
with the provisions of Part B of Section 7. In this case, a
The form may be used to record information;or either supporting PQR is requiredin addition to the W S . For the
a WPS or a PQR. The user should indicate their selected PQR, Form E l (Front) can again be used with anappropri-
application in the appropriate boxes or the user may ate heading change. Also, the Form El (Back) may be
choose to blank out the inappropriate headings. used to record the testresults and the certifying statement.
The WPSs and PQRs are to be signed by the autho- For the WPS, state the permitted ranges qualifiedby
rized representative of the Manufactureror Contractor. testing or state the appropriate tolerances on essential
For joint details on the WPS, a sketchor a referenceto variables (e.g.,250 amps *lo%).
the applicable prequalified joint detail
may be used (e.g., For the PQR, record the actual joint details and the
B-U4a). values of essential variables used in the testing. Attach a
copy of the Mill Test Report for the material tested. Test-
Prequalified ing laboratory data reports may also be included as
backup information.
, TheWPS may be Prequalified in accordance
with
all of The inclusion of items not required by this Specifica-
I the
provisions of 7.1, in
which
case only
the
one-page tion is optional; however, they may be of use in setting
document, Form El, is required. up equipment, or understanding test results.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
117
118
WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION (WPS) Yes

PREQUALIFIED
QUALIFIED BY TESTING
or PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORDS(PQR) Yes 0
Identification #
Date Revision BY
Company Name Date by Authorized
Welding Process(es) Type-Manual 0 Semi-Automatic 0
Supporting PQR No.(s) Machine 0 Automatic 0
JOINT DESIGN USED POSITION

Type: of Groove:
PositionFillet:
Single O Weld
Double 0 VerticalProgression:Up [7 Down
Backing: Y e s o No 0
Backing Material: ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Root Opening Root Face Dimension
Groove Angle: Radius (J-U) TransferMode(GMAW)Short-Circuiting 0
Back Gouging: Yes No 0 0 Method Globular 0 Spray 0
Current:AC 0 DCEP DCEN 0 Pulsed 0
BASE METALS Other
Material Spec. Tungsten Electrode(GTAW)
Type or Grade Size:
Fillet Groove
Thickness: Type:
Diameter (Pipe)
TECHNIQUE
FILLER METALS Stringer or Weave Bead:
AWS Specification Multi-pass or Single Pass(per side)
AWS Classification Number of Electrodes
Electrode
Longitudinal
Spacing
Lateral
SHIELDING Angle
.Flux
Composition Contact Tube to Work Distance
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Electrode-Flux
(Class)
Flow
Rate Peening
Gas Cup Size lnterpass Cleaning:
PREHEAT POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT

Preheat Temp., Min Temp.
Max
lnterpass
Min Temp., Time
WELDING PROCEDURE
Filler Metals Current
Pass or
Weld Type & Amps or Wire Travel
Layer(s) Process Class VoltsDiam.
Feed Speed
Polarity Speed Joint Details
119
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR)

#
Test Results
TENSILE TEST
GUIDED BEND TEST
Specimen
Type of bend Result Remarks
No.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
VISUAL INSPECTION
Appearance Radiographic-ultrasonic examination
Undercut Resultno.:
RT report
Piping porosity Resultno.:report UT
Convexity FILLET WELD TEST RESULTS
Test date Minimum size multiple pass Maximum size single pass
Witnessed by Macroetch Macroetch
1. ~ 3. 1. 3.
2. ___ 2.
Other Tests All-weld-metal tension test
Tensile strength, psi
Yield poinvstrength, psi
Elongation in2 in., Yo
Laboratory test no.
Welder's name Stamp no. Clock no.

Tests conducted by Laboratory
Test number
Per
We, the undersigned, certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared, welded, and
tested in accordance
with
the
requirements of ANSVAWS D l 4.1, ( 1.
(year)
Signed
Manufacturer or Contractor
Title
Date
120
WELDER, WELDING OPERATOR OR TACK WELDER QUALIFICATION TEST RECORD

Type of Welder
Name Identification No.
pecification
ProcedureWelding
Record Actual Values
Used in Qualification Qualification Range
Variables
Procesflype (7.1 6.2)
Electrode (single or multiple)
Current/Polarity
Position (7.16.5)
Weld Progression (7.1 6.7)
Backing (YES or NO) (7.16.8)

MateriaUSpec. (7.16.1)
Base Metal
Thickness: (Plate)
Groove
Fillet
Thickness: (PipeAube)
Groove
Fillet
Diameter: (Pipe)
Groove
Fillet
Filler Metal (7.16.3)
Spec. No.
Class
F-NO.
GadFlux Type (7.16.4)
VISUAL INSPECTION (7.12.6 or 7.12.7)

Acceptable YES orNO
Gulded Bend Test Results(7.28.1D.29)
Type
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Fillet Test Results (7.28.2R.28.3; 7.39.4R.39.5)

Appearance
Root Test Fracture Macroetch
Penetration
(Describe the location, nature, and size of any crack or tearing of the specimen.)
Inspected
Organization Date
I RESULTS TEST RADIOGRAPHIC (7.28.4R.39.2) I
Identification
Film Results Film Identification
Remarks Remarks
Number Number
I ~~
I
l
Interpreted by Test Number
Organization Date
We, the undersigned, certify that the statements correct and that the test welds were prepared, welded, and
in this record are
tested inaccordance with the requirementsof ANSUAWS 014.1, ( 1.
(Year)
zed
ontractor or Manufacturer
Date
S T D * A W S DL'i-L-ENGL L997 O 0 7 8 9 2 b 5 0507b57 2 8 9
121
WPS QUALIFICATION TEST RECORDFOR

ELECTROSLAG AND ELECTROGAS WELDING
TS TEST SPECIFICATION
PROCEDURE
specificationMaterial test tensile
Reduced-section
process Welding psi
Position 1.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Filler 2.
Filler metal classification
Filler metal
All-weld-metal tension test
Flux
Flow gasShielding
dew Gas
Thickness
qualifies
test
Elongation
range
this in 2 in., %
Single or multiple pass
or Single Sidebend tests
Welding current 1. 3.
Preheat temperature 2. 4.
Postheat temperature
Welder's name
Radiographic-ultrasonic examination
RT report no.
UT report no.
VISUAL INSPECTION
Appearance tests Impact
ze Undercut temp Test of specimen
Ft.lb:porosity
Piping 1. 2. ____ 3. ~ 4. ~
5. ~ 6. Avg .
Test date
y Witnessed
WELDING PROCEDURE
1
Welding current
Pass Electrode
no. size Amperes Volts Joint detail
Guide tube flux

Guide tube composition
Guide tube diameter
Vertical rise speed
Traverse length
Traverse speed
Dwell
Type of molding shoe
We, the undersigned, certify that the statements

in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared, welded, and
tested
in
accordance
with
the
requirements
of
ANSVAWS D14.1, ( 1.
(year)
no. Procedure
1
Revision
122
REPORT OF RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATIONOF WELDS
Project
Qualrty requirements-Section No.
Reported to
WELD LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION SKETCH
Technique
Source
Film to source
Exposure time
Screens
Film type
of all joints radiographed)

(Describe length, width, and thickness
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared and tested in
accordanœ with the
requirements of ANSVAWS D l4.1, ( ).
(year)
ManufacturerRadiographer(s) or contractor
Interpreter by
Test
123
REPORT OF MAGNETIC-PARTICLE EXAMINATION OF WELDS
Project
Quality requirements-Section No.
Reportedto
WELD LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION SKETCH
Rejected: TotalAccepted:Total Quantity:
PRE-EXAMINATION
Surface Preparation:
EQUIPMENT
Instrument S. No.:
METHOD OF INSPECTION
UDry Wet O Visible 0Fluorescent
How Media Applied:
Residual 0
0Continuous 0True-Continuous
AC DC 0 0Half-Wave
Prods Yoke Cable
Wrap Other
Field:
Direction
for Circular O Longitudinal
Strength of Field:
(Ampere-turns, field density, magnetizing force, number, and duration
of force application.)
POST EXAMINATION
Demagnetizing Technique(if required):
Method: Cleaning
Marking(if required):
in
in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared and tested
accordance
with
the
requirements
of
ANSVAWS D l 4.1, ( 1.
(year)
Inspector
Contractor
Level By
Test
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
124
REPORT OF ULTRASONIC TESTING OF WELDS

Project Report no.
Weld identification
Material thickness
Weld joint AWS
Welding process
Quality requirements-Section no.
Remarks
2
-
3
4
5
-
6
_.
7
-
8
9
- 10
- 11
- 12
13
- 14
15
- 16
17
18
- 19
20
-
23
-
24
25
-
-
26
We, the undersigned, certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the welds were prepared and tested in accordance
with
the
requirements of ANSVAWS
014.1, ( ).
(year)
nufacturer Test date

Inspected by by Authorized
Date
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Notes:
1. In order to attain Rating" d
(A) With instruments with gain control, use the formula - ba- c = d.
(B)With instruments with attenuation control, use the formula - a b- c = d.
(C) A plus or minus sign must accompany the "d" figure unless"d" is equal to zero.
2. Distance fromX is used in describing the locationof a weld discontinuityin a direction perpendicular to the weld refer-
ence line. Unless this figure is zero, a plus or minus sign must accompany it.
3. Distance fromY is used in describing the locationof a weld discontinuityin a direction parallelto the weld reference
line. This figureis attained by measuring the distance from the "Y" end of the weldto the beginningof said discontinuity.
4. Evaluation of Retested Repaired Weld Areas must be tabulated on a new line on the report form. If the original report
form is used, R, shall prefix the indication number.If additional forms are used, theR number shall prefix the report
number.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Customer Date
Order No. Material
Dwg. No. Specification
For
Pieces Description Comments
Soak Time
is limited to defectsof the type which

The above parts have been carefully tested with liquid penetrant. This inspection
can normally be located with the liquid penetrant inspection method.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
S T D * A W S DL4.L-ENGL L777 07842b5 OSO7bb3 582 H
Annex B
Commonly Used Metric Conversions
(This Annexis not apart of ANSUAWS D14.1-97, Specijìcation f o r Welding of Industrial and Mill Cranes and Other
Material Handling Equipment, but is included for information purposes only.)
Inch-millimeter conversion
1 in. = 25.4 m m exactly
To convert inches to millimeters, To convert millimeters to inches,
multiply the inch value by 25.4 divide the valueby millimeter value by25.4
Inch and Millimeter DecimalEc valents of Fractions of an Inch
Inch Inch
eter Decimal Fraction Millimeter Decimal Fraction
1/64 0.015 625 0.396 875 33/64 0.515 625 13.096 875
250 0.031 1/32 0.793 750 17/32 0.531250 13.493 750
875 0.046 3/64 1.190 625 3 5/64 0.546 875 13.890 625
0.062 1/16 500 1.587 500 9/16 0.562 500 14.287 500
5/64 125 0.078 1.984 375 37/64 0.578 125 14.684 375
750 0.093 3/32 2.381 250 19/32 0.593 750 15.081 250
375 0.109 7/64 2.778 125 39/64 0.609 375 15.478 125
118 0.125 O00 3.175 O00 518 0.625 O00 15.875 O00
9/64 625
O. 140 3.571 875 41/64 0.640 625 16.271 875
5/32 250
O. 156 3.968 750 21/32 0.656 250 16.668 750
875 0.171 11/64 4.365 625 43/64 0.671 875 17.065 625
3/16 O. 187 500 4.762 500 11/16 0.687 500 17.462 500
125 0.203 13/64 5.159 375 45/64 0.703 125 17.859 375
750
0.218
7132 5.556 250 23/32 0.7 I8 750 I8 256 250
15/64 375 0.234 5.953 125 47/64 0.734 375 18.653125
114 0.250 000 6.350 000 314 0.750 O 0 0 19.050 O00
625 0.265 17/64 6.746 875 49/64 0.765 625 19.446 875
2500.281
9132 7.143 750 25/32 0.781 250 19.843 750
875 0.296 19/64 7.540 625 5 1/64 0.796 875 20.240 625
0.35/16 12 500 7.937 500 13/16 0.8 12500 20.637 500
1250.328
2 1/64 8.334 375 5 3/64 0.828 125 2 1 .O34 375
750
0.343
1 I 132 8.731 250 27/32 0.843 750 2 I .431 250
375 0.359 23/64 9.128 125 55/64 0.859 375 2 1.828 125
318 0.375 O00 9.525 O00 718 0.875 O00 22.225 O00
625 0.390 25/64 9.921875 57/64 0.890 625 22.621 875
250 0.406 13/32 10.3I8 750 29/32 0.906 250 23.018 750
875 0.421 27/64 10.715 625 59/64 0.921 875 23.415 625
0.437 7/16 500 11.112500 15116 0.937 500 23.8 12 500
0.453 29/64 125 1 1SO9 375 6 1164 0.953 125 24.209 375
750 0.468 15/32 I l .906 250 3 1/32 0.968 750 24.606 250
3750.484
3 1/64 12.303 125 63/64 0.984 375 25.003125
112 0.500 000 12.700O00 1 1 .o00O00 25.400 O00
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 127
Pressure andStress Equivalents-Pounds-Force per Square Inch to Kilopascals
and Thousand Pounds-Forceper Square Inchto Megapascals
1 psi= 6894.757 Pa
To convert psito pascals, To convert pascals to psi,
multiply the psi value by 6.894 757
x l@ divide the pascal value by 6.894 757
X lo3
~~ ~~ ~~ ~
3 psi 2 O 1
or
ksi kPa or MPa
O O.ooO0 6.8948 13.7895 20.6843 27.5790 34.4738 41.3685 48.2633 55.1581 62.0528
10 68.9476 75.8423 82.7371 89.63 18 96.5266 103.4214 110.3161 117.2109 124.1056 131.0004
20 137.8951 144.7899 15 1.6847 158.5794 165.4742 172.3689 179.2637 186.1584 193.0532 199.9480
30 206.8427 213.7375 220.6322 227.5270 234.4217 241.3165 248.2113 255.1060 262.0008 268.8955
40 275.7903 282.6850 289.5798 296.4746 303.3693 310.2641 317.1588 324.0536 330.9483 337.843 1
50 344.7379 35 1.6326 358.5274 365.422 1 372.3169 379.2116 386.1064 393.0012 399.8959 406.7907
60 4 13.6854 420.5802 427.4749 434.3697 441.2645 448.1592 455.0540 461.9487 468.8435 475.7382
70 482.6330 489.5278 496.4225 503.3173 510.2120 517.1068 524.0015 530.8963 537.7911 544.6858
80 55 1.5806 558.4753 565.3701 572.2648 579.15% 586.0544 592.9491 599.8439 606.7386 61 3.6334
90 620.5281 627.4229 634.3177 641.2124 648.1072 655.0019 661.8967 668.7914 675.6862 682.58 1O
100 689.4757 ~~ ~ ~
This table maybe used to obtain SI equivalents of values expressed in psi or ksi.
SI values are usually expressed in kPa when original
value isin psi and in MPa when original value isin ksi.
This table maybe extended to valuesbelow 1 or above 100 psi (or ksi) by manipulation
of the decimal point and addition.
Reprinted by permissionof ASTh4.
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Annex C
Examples of Weld Quality Requirements
(This Annex is not a part of ANSVAWS D14.1-97, Specification for Welding of Industrial and Mill Cranes and Other
Material Handling Equipment,but i s included for information purposes only.)
t
I
I Il
EDGE OF MATERIALS
OR TOE OR ROOT OF W
FLANGE-TO-WEB WELD EDGEOF

MATERIAL
I I
L
.......... . I
x4
#
/
X1 '6 x 2
\
I
'3
\
\
't 71;
\ .:.:.:.:.:.
e
/.
(
......
....r.....
.:.:.:.:.>
1WELD
; (....OR.: t:
I
Il
J c
I
/
314
4
l I
/-,
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Notes:
1. A-minimum clearance allowed between edges of porosity or fusion-type discontinuities 1/16 in.(1.6 mm) or larger. Larger of adja-
cent discontinuities governs.
I 2. X, "largestpermissibleporosity or fusion-typediscontinuityfor 314 in.(19.0mm)jointthickness(seeFigure 36).
3. X2, XJ, X,-porosity or fusion-type discontinuity 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) or larger, but less than maximum permissible
3/4forin. (19.0 mm)
joint thickness.
4. X5, X6-porosity or fusion-type discontinuity less than 1/16 in. (1.6 mm).
Interpretation:
1. Porosity or fusion-type discontinuityX4 is not acceptable becauseit is within the minimum clearance allowed between edges
of such
discontinuities (see 8.11.2 and Figure
36).
2. Remainder of weld is acceptable.
*Discontinuity size indicated is assumedto be its greatest dimension.
129
~~
S T D D A W S D L 4 - L - E N G L L777 I0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0507bbb 271 I

131
Document List
The following documents have been preparedby the AWS Committee on Machinery and Equipment.
ANSUAWS D14.1 Industrial and Mill Crane and Other Material Handling Equipment, Specification for Welding
ANSVAWS D14.2 Metal Cutting Machine Tool Weldments, Speczjìcationfor
ANSVAWS D14.3 Earthmoving and Construction Equipment, Specifcation for Welding
ANSVAWS D14.4 Welded Joints in Machinery and Equipment, Specifcation for
ANSVAWS D14.5 Presses and Press Components, Specifcation for Welding of
ANSVAWS D14.6 Rotating Elements of Equipment, Specification for
--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Aws-D14 1M PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Aws-D14 1M PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

--````,`,```,```,`,,`,```,,`,``-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Supersedes ANSI/AWS D14.1-85

Under the Direction of

American Welding Society

International Standard BookNumber: 0-87 171-518-X

American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami,FL 33126

O 1998 by American Welding Society. All rights reserved

Other Material Handling Equipment, but is included for information purposes

3 Allowable Stress Range,ksi (MPa) ............................................................................................................... 8

23 Test joint for T-,Y-, and K- Connections on Pipe or Tubing-Welder Qualification................................. 86

Scope (1) Welding, as defined in the Scope, in accordance

Street, New York, NY 10036 be observed.

A (435) 63 37 (255) 24 (165) 24 (1 65)

welds parallel to the direction of applied stress

Base metal at members connected with transverse fillet

Plug or Slot Base metal at plugor slot welds T or Rev. E 27

(A) WELD DEPOSITEDBY (B) WELD DEPOSITED BY A

OF ROOT WELD INFORCEMENT

(C) ACTUAL THROAT OFA BEVEL GROOVE

Figure 2"Fillet and Combined Weld Dimension

EFFECTIVE THROAT, FLAT OR CONVEX

EFFECTIVE THROAT, FLAT OR CONVEX

(C) COMBINATION GROOVE-FILLET WELD

Figure 3-Size and Effective Throat of Fillet and Combination Groove-Fillet

4.4.5 Fillet welds in holes or slots may be used to

4.4.6 Fillet welds shall not be used in skewed T-joints

4.5 Intermittent Fillet Welds

containing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm), preferably rounded to

JOINT CLASS CONflGURATlON OF WELDED JOINTS

Figure 5-Classification of Welded Joints

JOINT CLASS CONFIGURATION OF WELDED JOINTS

hTJy+ .A. IL.

NOTE: AVOID LOADING THE JOINTIN THE ARROW DIRECTION.

Figure 5 (Continued)-Classification of Welded Joints

Figure 6"Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

;quare-groove weld (1)

jingle-V-groove weld(2) Tolerances

Base Metal Thickness

Figure 6 (Continued)"Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove

jingle-V-groove weld (2)

SMAW B-U2 U - f = O to 118 + l l l 6 , -O Not limited All C

1 Over 1-112 to 2 f = 518 max

Figure 6 (Continued) -€'requalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove WeldedJoints

T Base Metal Thickness

louble-V-groove weld(3) Tolerances

Figure 6 (Continued) "Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

Double-V-groove weld (3)

-P- 1 For T, > 6-114,

Figure 6 (Continued)"Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

Single-bevel-groove weld (4) Tolerances

Base Metal Thickness

SMAW B-U4a U - R = 114 a = 45" All - Br

Single-bevel-grooveweld (4) I Tolerances 1I

Figure 6 (Continued)"Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove

Singíe-bevel-grme weld (4)

:!,f B-U4b-GF U - f = O to 118

Single-bevel-groove weld (4)

U U R = O to 118 +1/16, -0 +1/16, -118 All C,J, V

Figure 6 (Continued) "Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

Base Metal Thickness

I Base Metal Thickness

Figure 6 (Continued) "Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

Figure 6 (Continued)"Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints